O w n e r’s Ma n u a l
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the STUDIO Canvas SD-80.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” (Owner’s manual pp. 3--4), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s
manual p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning
the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that
you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit,
Getting started and Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety. The
manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2002 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USIN G THE UN IT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
006 When using the unit with a rack or stand
recommended by Roland, the rack or stand
must be carefully placed so it is level and
sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or
stand, you still need to make sure that any
location you choose for placing the unit
•
001 Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
................................................................................................
•
002a
•
Do not open or perform any internal modifi-
cations on the unit.
................................................................................................
provides a level surface that will properly
support the unit, and keep it from wobbling.
................................................................................................
•
003 Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace
parts within it (except when this manual
provides specific instructions directing you
to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,
the nearest EDIROL/ Roland Service Center,
or an authorized EDIROL/ Roland
•
007 Make sure you always have the unit placed
so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never
place it on stands that could wobble, or on
inclined surfaces.
distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
008a
•
004 Never use or store the unit in places that are:
•
The unit should be connected to a power
supply only of the type described in the
operating instructions, or as marked on the
unit.
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near
a heating duct, on top of heat-generating
equipment); or are
................................................................................................
008e
•
Use only the attached power-supply cord.
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet
floors); or are
• Humid; or are
................................................................................................
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
................................................................................................
•
005 This unit should be used only with a rack or
stand that is recommended by Roland.
................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
009 Do not excessively twist or bend the power
101a
•
•
The unit should be located so that its location
cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so
can damage the cord, producing severed
elements and short circuits. Damaged cords
are fire and shock hazards!
or position does not interfere with its proper
ventilation.
................................................................................................
102b
•
Always grasp only the plug on the power-
supply cord when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
................................................................................................
•
010 This unit, either alone or in combination with
an amplifier and headphones or speakers,
may be capable of producing sound levels
that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do
not operate for a long period of time at a high
volume level, or at a level that is uncom-
fortable. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, you should immediately
stop using the unit, and consult an audiol-
ogist.
................................................................................................
•
104 Try to prevent cords and cables from
becoming entangled. Also, all cords and
cables should be placed so they are out of the
reach of children.
................................................................................................
•
106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy
objects on the unit.
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
107b
•
011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
•
Never handle the power cord or its plugs
with wet hands when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
................................................................................................
108a
................................................................................................
•
Before moving the unit, disconnect the power
plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords
from external devices.
•
013 In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for
the safe operation of the unit.
................................................................................................
109a
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power
and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
................................................................................................
•
014 Protect the unit from strong impact.
................................................................................................
110a
(Do not drop it!)
................................................................................................
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of
lightning in your area, pull the plug on the
power cord out of the outlet.
•
015 Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to
share an outlet with an unreasonable number
of other devices. Be especially careful when
using extension cords—the total power used
by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the
power rating (watts/ amperes) for the
................................................................................................
•
118*W* henever you've removed any screws—
whether it be when connecting something to
the ground terminal, or when installing a
rack-mount adaptor or desk-stand mount—be sure
to place the screws out of reach of small children, so
they won't be swallowed accidentally.
extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the
insulation on the cord to heat up and
eventually melt through.
................................................................................................
•
016 Before using the unit in a foreign country,
consult with your retailer, the nearest
EDIROL/ Roland Service Center, or an autho-
rized EDIROL/ Roland distributor, as listed
on the "Information" page.
................................................................................................
•
023 DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conven-
tional audio CD player. The resulting sound
may be of a level that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Damage to speakers or other
system components may result.
................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
291b
402
•
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of
any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration
and/ or deformation.
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” on pages 2, 3 and 4, please read and
observe the following:
553
•
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the
unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when
using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can
lead to malfunctions.
Po w e r Su p p ly
301
554
•
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with
any device that will generate line noise (such as an
electric motor or variable lighting system).
•
555
•
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
A small amount of noise may be heard from the
display during normal operation.
307
556
•
•
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off
the power to all units. This will help prevent
malfunctions and/ or damage to speakers or other
devices.
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp
the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This
way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the
cable’s internal elements.
557
•
A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit
during normal operation.
Pla ce m e n t
351
558a
•
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other
equipment containing large power transformers)
may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change
the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away
from the source of interference.
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the
unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer
to use headphones, so you do not need to be
concerned about those around you (especially when
it is late at night).
352a
559a
•
This device may interfere with radio and television
•
When you need to transport the unit, package it in
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of
such receivers.
the box (including padding) that it came in, if
possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent
packaging materials.
352b
•
Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the
vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when
receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing.
Should you experience such problems, you should
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater
distance from this unit, or switch them off.
Ha n d lin g CD-RO Ms
801
•
Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-
ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your
discs clean using a commercially available CD
cleaner.
355
•
To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in
a wet area, such as an area exposed to rain or other
moisture.
Ma in te n a n ce
401a
•
For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry
cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with
water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impreg-
nated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. After-
wards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a
soft, dry cloth.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
How to read this manual ....................................................................................................9
Main features ........................................................................................................................9
Front Panel...............................................................................................................10
Rear Panel ................................................................................................................12
Operations in the basic screen..........................................................................................13
Listening to the internal demo songs...................................................................13
Adjusting the brightness of the display (Contrast)............................................15
About the sound generator modes..................................................................................16
About GM2/ Native modes ..............................................................................................17
GM2/ Native mode sound sets .............................................................................17
About parts and sounds....................................................................................................18
Different types of part............................................................................................18
Polyphony and voices............................................................................................18
Specifying the function of the MIDI connectors............................................................19
USB mode ................................................................................................................19
MIDI mode ..............................................................................................................20
Specifying the function of the MIDI connectors............................................................21
Switching the sound generator mode .............................................................................22
Selecting a part ...................................................................................................................23
Selecting the type of part (INST/ DRUM) ......................................................................24
Selecting the sound set ......................................................................................................25
Selecting a sound................................................................................................................26
Selecting a drum set...........................................................................................................27
Muting/ soloing a part.......................................................................................................28
Muting a part...........................................................................................................28
Soloing a part...........................................................................................................29
About parameters ..............................................................................................................30
Editing the parameters......................................................................................................31
Editing part parameters.........................................................................................31
Editing parameters that are common to all parts ..............................................32
About parameters that can be edited from the SD-80’s panel.....................................33
Part parameters (GM2 mode, Native mode) ......................................................33
Part parameters (Native mode) ............................................................................37
Parameters common to all parts (GM2 mode, Native mode) ..........................38
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the sound generator effects ..................................................................................39
Editing the sound generator effects.................................................................................40
Parameters that can be edited in GM2 mode.................................................................41
Reverb (System Effect)...........................................................................................41
Chorus (System Effect)...........................................................................................41
EQ (Equalizer).........................................................................................................42
Parameters that can be edited in Native mode..............................................................43
Reverb (System Effect)...........................................................................................43
Chorus (System Effect)...........................................................................................45
MFX (Multi-effects) ................................................................................................46
EQ (Equalizer).........................................................................................................48
Adjusting the contrast of the display ..............................................................................50
Saving a patch.....................................................................................................................50
Switching the sound generator mode (Inst Initialize) ..................................................50
Transmitting sound generator settings to an external MIDI device...........................50
Specifying the start-up sound generator mode .............................................................51
Setting the Device ID Number .........................................................................................51
Transmitting button/ knob operations to an external MIDI device ...........................51
Preview settings .................................................................................................................52
Setting the system tempo..................................................................................................52
Switching the driver ..........................................................................................................52
Restoring the factory settings...........................................................................................52
Controlling the internal sound generator.......................................................................53
Switching the sound generator mode..................................................................53
Switching the sound set.........................................................................................55
Switching the type of part .....................................................................................56
Switching sounds....................................................................................................58
Switching the drum set ..........................................................................................61
Editing MIDI effect parameters ............................................................................63
Writing/ loading SD-80 settings ...........................................................................69
Part parameter list..............................................................................................................75
Part parameters (GM2 mode, Native mode) ......................................................75
Part parameters (Native mode) ............................................................................75
Parameters common to all parts (GM2 mode, Native mode) ..........................75
Parameters common to all parts (Native mode) ................................................76
Effect parameter list...........................................................................................................77
Effect parameter (GM2 mode) ..............................................................................77
Effect parameter (Native mode) ...........................................................................78
MFX parameter list ............................................................................................................80
Instrument list (GM2 / Native mode) ............................................................................95
Instrument list (Special sound) ......................................................................................100
Instrument list (GS mode)...............................................................................................101
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Instrument list (XGlite mode) ........................................................................................103
Drum set list (GM2 / Native mode)..............................................................................105
Classical set drum set (1) .....................................................................................106
Classical set drum set (2) .....................................................................................107
Contemporary set drum set (1)...........................................................................108
Contemporary set drum set (1)...........................................................................109
Solo set drum set (1).............................................................................................110
Solo set drum set (2).............................................................................................111
Enhanced set drum set (1) ...................................................................................112
Enhanced set drum set (2) ...................................................................................113
Drum set list (GS mode)..................................................................................................114
GS mode drum set (1) ..........................................................................................115
GS mode drum set (2) ..........................................................................................116
Drum set list (XGlite mode)............................................................................................117
XGlite mode drum set (1) ....................................................................................118
XGlite mode drum set (2) ....................................................................................119
XGlite mode drum set (3) ....................................................................................121
INDEX.................................................................................... 126
*
204 Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
206e
*
Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
*
ADDWindows® XP is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system.”
206fWindows® 2000 is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® 2000 operating system.”
*
206g
*
Windows® Me is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition operating system.”
206cWindows® 98 is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system.”
207 Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
209 MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
*
*
*
203
*
GS (
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.
ADD
*
XG (
) and XGlite ( ) are trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation.
*
231 OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems, Inc.
232 FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn, Inc.
220 All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
*
*
owners.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In tro d u ctio n
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Edirol SD-80 Studio Canvas.
Ho w to re a d th is m a n u a l
The documentation for the SD-80 consists of a Getting Started, a Owner’s Manual, and Additional
Information (PDF) on the included CD-ROM.
•
The Getting Started takes you through the steps you need to follow in order to get ready to use the SD-
80 with your computer. Please read this first.
•
The Owner’s Manual explains how to use all the basic features of the SD-80. After you have made
settings for the SD-80 as described in the Getting Started, and have verified that it produces sound
correctly, refer to the Owner’s Manual as necessary, depending on the purpose you have in mind.
• Additional Information explains various settings you can make in order to take full advantage of the
SD-80’s functionality. Read this material as necessary. In order to read the Additional Information PDF
file, you will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The most recent version of the Adobe Acrobat Reader
can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website. http:/ / www.adobe.com/
(This URL may change without notice.)
•
•
Letters and numbers enclosed in [ ] indicate buttons on the panel of the SD-80.
Areas enclosed by a gray rectangular frame contain supplementary explanations for a function, or tips
for operation.
•
If the SD-80 does not operate as you expect, refer to "Troubleshooting" (p. 71).
Ma in fe a tu re s
●High performance MIDI sound generator with powerful synthesizer engine and high quality waveforms in a
slim body!!
•
•
•
•
•
•
32-part, 128-voice polyphony
1050 tones, 30 drum sets and 3 units of Multi Effects
Optical/ Coaxial Digital output (S/ P DIF)
2-stereo/ 4-mono multi-outputs
2-port external MIDI IN/ OUT
Multi-purpose design (Desktop / Rack-mount type)
●Professional quality sound in a compact body… New generation of Studio Canvas Digital
The SD-80 follows a world leading technology of synthesizer sound engines and high quality waveforms.
The professional-quality MIDI tone module has 1050 MIDI instruments sounds, 30 drum sets, and also
GM2/ GS/ XGlite compatible standard sounds. It is capable of 32-part 128-voice polyphony and 3 units of
multi effects, including guitar distortion, organ with rotary speaker, and modulated electric piano.
●Studio use? Or on your desktop…
The SD-80’s GM2/ GS/ XGlite compatible sound selections are suitable for studio use. The versatile
mounting tabs allow the SD-80 to be rack-mounted for studio use, or vertically mounted for desktop use.
USB connection to computer is quick and easy for use with Mac or PC. Maintain the highest quality
sounds by sending MIDI digitally through optical/ coaxial digital output or assign multiple analog
outputs through 2-stereo/ 4-mono channels.
The SD-80 is equally at home on your desktop… or in your rack. Provides tons of connection options like
USB, Coaxial S/ P DIF, Optical S/ P DIF and _” phone jacks… to make the sound of your own.
●SD-80 Editor Software
SD-80 ships with a powerful software editor that can control the SD-80’s sound parameters by a graphical
interface. The software editor provides control over tone editing, patch changes, and effect parameters
that can be preserved. SD-80 also has built-in memory for preserving “user patches”.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N a m e s o f th in g s a n d w h a t th e y d o
● Fro n t Pa n e l
fig.1-01
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
9
10 11 12 14
13
16
15
1
2
3
4
Display
This shows various types of information (such as level meters or parameter values) related to the current
state.
VALUE dial
Turn this dial to change a parameter’s setting, or “value.” If you hold down [SHIFT] as you turn
[VALUE], the parameter’s value will change by larger increments.
INST (Instrument) Button
Use this button to select the instrument (sound) or drum set assigned to each part. ("Selecting a sound"
(p. 26), "Selecting a drum set" (p. 27))
EFFECTS Button
Use this button to select an effect (MFX) for the internal sound generator, or to edit effect parameters
("About the sound generator effects" (p. 39)).
5
6
SYSTEM Button
Use this button to make settings that affect the entire SD-80 system ("System-related settings" (p. 49)).
PART Buttons
Use these buttons to switch the part display.
If you press [ ] and [ ] simultaneously, all parameters will be displayed ("Editing parameters that are
common to all parts" (p. 32)).
7
8
VOLUME Knob
This knob adjusts the output level of the audio signal that is output from the rear panel OUTPUT 1 jacks
and from the headphone jack.
fig.1-01a
POWER Switch
This turns the power of the SD-80 on/ off. The power is on
when the switch is pressed in, and the power is off when the
switch is in the outward position. When the power is on, the
white backlighting of the LCD screen will also be on.
Pressed in
ON
Outward position
OFF
1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Names of things and what they do
9
Mode Indicators
This indicates the sound generator mode in which the SD-80 is operating. The indicator of the current
sound generator mode will light red.
In the case of XGlite mode, all the mode indicators will be dark.
1 0 PAGE Buttons
Use these buttons to switch between screens that consist of multiple pages ("Editing part parameters"
(p. 31)).
1 1 SHIFT Button
This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to change the function of the other button.
1 2 ENTER Button
Use this button to execute an operation or to select a screen.
1 3 MIDI Indicator
This will light when the SD-80 is operating in MIDI mode. ("MIDI mode" (p. 20))
1 4 PREVIEW Button
Use this button to audition the currently selected sound (instrument) ("Auditioning the sounds
(Preview)" (p. 14).
1 5 USB Indicator
This will light when the SD-80 is operating in USB mode. ("USB mode" (p. 19))
When you connect the SD-80 to your computer via a USB cable, the SD-80 will automatically switch to
USB mode. If your computer is not powered-on, or if the USB cable is disconnected, the SD-80 will
automatically switch to MIDI mode.
1 6 Headphone Jack
A set of headphones can be connected to this jack. The headphone jack outputs the same signal as the
OUTPUT 1 jacks.
1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Names of things and what they do
● Re a r Pa n e l
fig.1-02
19
20
18
17
21
22
23
1 7 AC IN Connector
Connect the supplied AC cable here. Never use any AC cable other than the one provided, since doing so
may cause malfunction.
1 8 Grounding Terminal
In some cases, depending on the environment in which the unit is installed, the surface of the panel may
sometimes feel rough and grainy. This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge, which is absolutely
harmless. However, if you are concerned about this, connect the ground terminal (see figure) with an
external ground. When the unit is grounded, a slight hum may occur, depending on the particulars of
your installation. If you are unsure of the connection method, contact the nearest Roland Service Center,
or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
●Unsuitable places for connection
•
•
•
Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be dangerous in the event of lightning)
1 9 OUTPUT Jacks
These jacks output audio signals to your audio playback system or amplified speakers.
The output destination setting of a part will determine whether its sound is sent to OUTPUT jacks 1 or 2.
Normally, the sound will be sent to the OUTPUT 1 jacks.
The front panel VOLUME knob affects only the OUTPUT 1 jacks.
2 0 DIGITAL OUT Jacks
These jacks can be connected to digital audio devices such as CD players and MD players to transfer
digital audio signals.
Use a coaxial cable for COAXIAL, and an optical digital cable for OPTICAL.
*
*
The digital output transmits the OUTPUT 1 signal.
The signal that is sent from the SD-80' s DIGITAL OUT jack may be digitally copied for one or more generations.
2 1 MIDI OUT/THRU Switch
If this is set to [IN1 THRU], the MIDI messages sent to the MIDI IN 1 connector will be retransmitted
without change from the MIDI OUT 2 connector.
2 2 MIDI Connectors
These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices, such as a sequencer, allowing the exchange of
MIDI messages ("Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI" (p. 53)).
IN1/IN2:
These connectors receive MIDI messages from other devices. The received MIDI
messages are sent to the computer (in USB mode) or to the internal sound generator (in
MIDI mode).
OUT1/OUT2: These connectors transmit MIDI messages to other devices.
2 3 USB Connector
A USB cable can be used to connect the SD-80 to your computer.
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ba sic o p e ra tio n
O p e ra tio n s in th e b a sic scre e n
The SD-80 contains a diverse array of sounds, ranging from instrumental sounds such as piano/ organ/
guitar for an ensemble, to sound effects such as birdsong and telephone ringers. Each of these sounds is
called an instrument. Here’s how to select instruments and listen to the variety of sounds that the SD-80
provides.
● Liste n in g to th e in te rn a l d e m o so n g s
The SD-80 contains demo songs. Here’s how to listen to these demo songs, and hear the sounds and
effects.
fig.2-05
2,6
1
3
4,5
1 . Turn the [VOLUME] knob fully counterclockwise (minimum setting).
2 . Press [SYSTEM].
The button will light.
fig.2-05a
3 . Press [PAGE ] to get the screen shown at right to
appear.
4 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select a demo song.
fig.2-05b
5 . Press [ENTER], and the demo song will begin playing.
Slowly turn the [VOLUME] knob clockwise to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level. Once the demo song has
played to the end, it will automatically be played over
again, starting from the beginning.
6 . Press [ENTER] once again to stop the demo song.
At this time you will automatically return to the beginning of the song.
7 . Press [INST] to return to the main screen.
*
*
Use of the song data supplied with this product for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a
secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder.
No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT.
1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
● Au d itio n in g th e so u n d s (Pre vie w )
On the SD-80, sounds are specified using two numbers: the instrument number and the variation
number. By pressing [PREVIEW] you can audition the currently selected sound.
fig.2-03a
2
1
1 . Press [PREVIEW]. While you continue pressing [PREVIEW], the button will light and a phrase will play.
When you release the button, the phrase will stop.
If you press the [PREVIEW] key and release it immediately, the phrase will play back to the end. In this
case, you can stop the phrase playback by pressing [PREVIEW] once again.
2 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to switch sounds.
At start-up, the native mode sounds will be selected.
Ch a n g in g th e Pre vie w se ttin g s
At the factory settings, you can audition a characteristic phrase that uses the currently selected sound
(Phrase Preview). Alternatively, you can set it so that Preview will play a single note at the pitch (key)
and strength (velocity) that you specify.
For details on Preview settings, refer to "Preview settings" (p. 52).
1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
● Ad ju stin g th e b rig h tn e ss o f th e d isp la y (Co n tra st)
Immediately after the power is turned on, or after the SD-80 has been used for an extended period, or
depending on the conditions in which it is placed, the characters or icons in the display screen may
become difficult to read. If this happens, you can adjust the contrast of the display.
fig.2-02
5
1
3
2
4
1 . Press [SYSTEM].
The button will light.
2 . Press [PAGE ] or [PAGE ] until LCD Contrast is displayed.
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to adjust the contrast of the display.
fig.2-03
LCD Contrast 1–4–5
Adjusts the contrast of the display.
4 . Press [ENTER]. The contrast setting you specify will be remembered by the SD-80.
*
Do not turn off the power while the setting is being stored (while “(TBD)” is displayed). Doing so will cause all data
stored in the SD-80 to be lost.
5 . Press [INST] to return to the main screen.
1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usin g th e in te rn a l so u n d g e n e ra to r
generator has four modes to support different sound generator formats, and you can select the mode you
want to use. For details on the sound generator modes, refer to "About the sound generator modes" (p.
16).
Multi-effect, chorus, reverb, and equalizer (a total of four effects units) are also built-in, letting you
apply effects to the internal sound generator. For details on the effects, refer to "Using the effects of the
internal sound generator" (p. 39).
Ab o u t th e so u n d g e n e ra to r m o d e s
The SD-80 has four sound generator modes: GM2, Native, GS, and XGlite.
GM2 mode further consists of four sound sets, and Native mode consists of six sound sets. For details on
the sound sets, refer to "GM2/Native mode sound sets" (p. 17).
With the factory settings, the SD-80 is set to start up in Native mode.
GM2 m o d e
This sound generator mode is compatible with the “GM2” sound generator format.
GM2 is “recommended practice,” and it is backwardly compatible with GM. It was created in order to
allow more sophisticated performance expression and greater compatibility. It includes detailed
definitions concerning sound editing and the use of effects (things that weren’t covered by the earlier GM
format), and it also expands the sound set. GM2-compatible sound generators will correctly play back
music data bearing either the GM or GM2 logos.
When it is necessary to make a distinction, this manual will sometimes refer to “GM1” to indicate the
earlier GM format which does not include the extended specifications of GM2.
N a tive m o d e
This is the sound generator mode that allows you to take advantage of the SD-80’s full potential.
It uses the same instrument files and sound sets as GM2 mode, and provides a greater number of editable
parameters.
In addition, it provides two special sound sets that collect the most distinctive of the sounds of the SD-80.
GS m o d e
This sound generator mode supports the “GS” sound generator format promoted by Roland Corporation.
In addition to the General MIDI functionality, this format expands the sound set, and also enhances
compatibility by providing detailed specifications for functionality such as sound editing and effects
(reverb and chorus). For flexibility in meeting future needs, it also provides for the addition of new
sounds and expanded functionality. Since the GS format is compatible with GM, it allows GM scores to be
played in the same way as GS music data (music data created in conformity with the GS format).
*
It is not possible to edit GS mode sound generator parameters from the panel of the SD-80.
XGlite m o d e
XG is a sound generator format promoted by Yamaha Corporation, which is based on GM1 (General
MIDI 1). It provides detailed specifications concerning expansion of the sound sets, editing methods, and
effects structures and types.
XGlite is a reduced-functionality (“lite”) version of XG, which allows simple playback of XG music data
on a sound generator bearing the XGlite logo. Since XGlite has some limitations on the parameters and
effects that can be controlled, the XG music data may sound different than the original data.
*
It is not possible to edit XGlite mode sound generator parameters from the panel of the SD-80.
1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Ab o u t GM2 / N a tive m o d e s
● GM2 / N a tive m o d e so u n d se ts
The sounds sets of GM2 mode and Native mode are organized by their character into four or six
variations.
fig.5-01
Cla ssica l
SD-80
This is the basic sound set that blends well into an ensemble. This set is
also used when GM2 data compatibility is important.
GM2
Native
Classical
Classical
Co n te m p o ra ry
Contemporary
Solo
Contemporary
Solo
This sound set emphasizes the realism of each individual instrument. It
contains numerous sounds that use velocity switching for expressive
dynamics.
Enhanced
Enhanced
Special 1
Special 2
So lo
This sound set contains mainly sounds that are designed to be
distinctive when used to play solos. These sounds include spacious
stereo-sampled sounds, as well as sounds that are switched by velocity.
GS
XGlite
En h a n ce d
This sound set concentrates on sounds that are designed with multi-effects (MFX), such as distortion
guitar and rotary organ. You can obtain an effect simply by selecting one of these sounds. The set also
includes acoustic instruments with a clear upper register produced by equalization processing, and synth
sounds based on multi-effects.
Up to three enhanced sounds can be used simultaneously. This set also contains some sounds that do not
use MFX.
*
With the factory settings in Native mode, parts 1--3 allow you to use special sounds or enhanced sounds that use
MFX.
Sp e cia l
This sound set can be used only in Native mode. It consists mainly of the best sounds of the SD-80 from
the Enhanced set, and also includes highly original sounds not defined by GM2.
As with the Enhanced set, most sounds use multi-effects (MFX).
Parameters that can be used in GM2 mode
fig.5-01a
In GM2 mode it is not possible to edit
Part
Parameters
Part 1
Part 2
Sounds
Sounds
the sounds themselves.
Multi-effects (MFX) and the sounds
are always handled as a unit, and are
always included in the Enhanced
sound set. (In the example shown in
the diagram at right, an Enhanced
sound is selected for Part 2.)
Part
Parameters
MFX
Part
Parameters
Part 32
Sounds
1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Ab o u t p a rts a n d so u n d s
The SD-80 is able to produce 32 different sounds at once. A sound generator such as the SD-80 that is able
to produce many different sounds simultaneously is called a “multitimbral sound module.” “Timbre”
refers to the unique characteristics that result in the sound of one instrument being different from that of
another. The ability to simultaneously produce 32 different instrument sounds means that, using the
analogy of an orchestra, you can produce an ensemble consisting of 32 different instrumental parts. On
the SD-80, the sound produced by each part is called an Instrument ("Instrument list (GM2 / Native
mode)" (p. 95)). You can assign a desired instrument to each of the 32 parts, creating a 32-part ensemble.
● Diffe re n t ty p e s o f p a rt
The SD-80 has 32 parts, which are divided into groups A and B. Each group is numbered from 01–16; i.e.,
A01–A16 and B01–B16.
Each part can be set either as an Inst part or a Drum part. Inst parts are used to play melody, bass, etc.
Drum parts are used to play percussion-type sounds. This setting is called the Part Mode.
By default, the following part mode is selected for each part.
Part mode
Inst part
Corresponding parts
A01–09, A11–16, B01–09, B11–16
A10, B10
Drum part
● Po ly p h o n y a n d vo ice s
Each of the SD-80’s sounds consist of units called “voices.” There is a limit to the number of voices that
can be used, and the SD-80 is able to use 128 voices simultaneously. Some sounds (instruments) use
more than one voice ("Instrument list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 95)). The main reason that an instrument
uses some voices is so that velocity can be used to shift between different sounds, or so that multiple
sounds can be layered to create a richer tone.
When you attempt to play more than 128 voices on the SD-80, the most-recently played note will be given
priority, and the oldest of the currently-sounding notes will be turned off one by one. If you are using
only instruments that consist of only one voice, you will be able to play 128 notes simultaneously.
However, if you use instruments that consist of two or four voices, fewer than 128 notes can be played
simultaneously. Even if a MIDI note-off message is received, a voice will continue to be used as long as
that note continues to sound. You need to remain aware of this, particularly when using sounds that have
a long release time.
1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Sp e cify in g th e fu n ctio n o f th e MIDI co n n e cto rs
The SD-80 has two modes in which MIDI data is transferred differently: USB mode and MIDI mode.
The mode is switched automatically depending on the connector you use.
● USB m o d e
fig.7-2
THRU function : ON
MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connectors
will not be passed directly to the internal sound
generator. They will be sent via USB to the computer
(sequencer software).
This means that if you have started up in USB
mode, playing an external MIDI keyboard
connected to a MIDI IN connector will not play the
SD-80’s internal sound generator. In order for the
MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connectors
to be passed to the internal sound generator, you
must turn on the Thru function of your software
running on your USB-connected computer. “Thru”
is a function by which MIDI messages received from
the SD-80’s USB connector are retransmitted back to
the SD-80’s USB connector. If the Thru function is
turned on, the MIDI messages received at the MIDI
IN connectors will pass through the computer and
be passed to the SD-80’s internal sound generator,
causing sound to be produced.
USB
MIDI OUT 1
MIDI OUT 2
Part group A
Part A1 - A16
MIDI IN 1
MIDI IN 2
Part group B
Part B1 - B16
*
The number of internal sound generator parts that can be
controlled from the USB connector will depend on the
capabilities of your sequencer software. This means that
even if you connect the SD-80 to your computer via USB,
you will not necessarily be able to use all 32 parts. Please
carefully read the owner’s manual for your sequencer
software.
SD-80
*
The USB indicator will light.
1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
● MIDI m o d e
fig.7-3
The MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN
connectors will be passed directly to the internal
sound generator.
MIDI
interface
The SD-80 has two MIDI IN connectors, and each
MIDI IN connector can receive data for 16 Parts. In
MIDI mode, when you play using the MIDI
connectors, group A corresponds to the MIDI IN 1
connector and group B corresponds to the MIDI IN 2
connector. In other words, the MIDI messages
received at MIDI IN 1 will play Parts 01–16 of group
A, and the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN 2 will
play Parts 01–16 of group B. For example, a MIDI
message received at MIDI IN 1 on channel 5 will play
Group A Part 5 (A05) (when still set to the default
settings).
USB
MIDI OUT 1
MIDI OUT 2
MIDI IN 1
MIDI IN 2
Part group A
Part A1 - A16
*
If you want to change the correspondence of Parts to MIDI
channels, you can send the System Exclusive message
Rx.CHANNEL via MIDI.
Part group B
Part B1 - B16
*
*
The MIDI indicator will light.
If you want to use the SD-80 in MIDI mode, disconnect the
USB cable from the SD-80' s USB connector.
SD-80
2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Sp e cify in g th e fu n ctio n o f th e MIDI co n n e cto rs
If the MIDI OUT/THRU switch on the rear panel is set to [IN1 THRU], MIDI messages received at the MIDI
IN 1 connector will be retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT 2 connector.
If the SD-80 is operating in USB mode and this switch is set to [IN1 THRU], MIDI messages received at
the MIDI IN 1 connector will be "thru-ed" from the MIDI OUT 2 connector. The MIDI messages that would
normally be output from the computer to the MIDI OUT 1 connector will no longer be output. (They will
not be merged.) In this case, it will not be possible to use USB external output 2 (EDIROL SD-80 MIDI
OUT 2) from the computer.
However, if the SD-80 is operating in MIDI mode and this switch is set to [IN1 THRU], MIDI messages
received at the MIDI IN 1 connector will be "thru-ed" from the MIDI OUT 1 connector as well as being sent
to PART A. In this case, if an external MIDI device sends a dump request to PART B, it will not be
possible to transmit the response.
fig.7-4a
USB mode
THRU function : ON
MIDI mode
THRU function : ON
MIDI
interface
USB
USB
MIDI OUT 1
MIDI OUT 2
Part group A
MIDI OUT 1
MIDI OUT 2
Part A1 - A16
Part group A
Part A1 - A16
MIDI IN 1
MIDI IN 2
Part group B
MIDI IN 1
MIDI IN 2
Part group B
Part B1 - B16
Part B1 - B16
SD-80
SD-80
2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Sw itch in g th e so u n d g e n e ra to r m o d e
Here’s how to switch the sound generator mode. The sound generator mode can be switched from the
front panel, or by MIDI messages from an external device. Please be aware that the sound generator will
be initialized when you switch the sound generator mode.
fig.5-02
5
1
3
2
4
1 . Press [SYSTEM].
The button will light.
fig.7-01a_67.2
2 . Press [PAGE ] or [PAGE ] until you have Inst Init
showing in the display.
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select the desired sound generator mode (GM2, Native, GS, XGlite).
fig.5-02a
4 . Press [ENTER]. You will switch to the sound generator mode you selected in step 3.
The front panel mode indicators show the current sound generator mode.
5 . Press [INST] to return to the main screen.
Co n ve n ie n t fu n ctio n s
You can use the following shortcuts to switch the sound generator mode.
fig.5-01a
1
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press the button for the desired sound generator
mode.
[INST] ............. GM2 ON (GM2 mode)
[EFFECTS] ..... NATIVE ON (Native mode)
[SYSTEM]....... GS RESET (GS mode)
2 . The front panel mode indicators show the current sound generator mode.
2
1
2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Se le ctin g a p a rt
Here’s how to select the part that you want to edit.
fig.5-03
1
2
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
fig.5-03a_67.2
2 . Press [PART ] or [PART ] to select the part to be
edited. The number of the part currently being edited is
indicated at the bottom of the display.
2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Se le ctin g th e ty p e o f p a rt (IN ST/ DRUM)
Here’s how to select the type (Part Mode) for each part.
*
Inst Type can be executed only if the sound generator mode is GM2 mode or Native mode.
fig.5-04
1,4
3
2
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
2 . Press [PAGE ] until the display indicates Inst Type.
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select the desired part mode
(INST or DRUM).
The part mode has now been selected.
4 . Press [INST] once again to return to the basic screen.
2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Se le ctin g th e so u n d se t
In GM2 mode you can choose one of four different sound sets. In Native mode you can choose one of six
different sound sets.
fig.5-05
1,4
3
2
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
fig.5-05a_67.2
2 . Press [PAGE ] until the display indicates Inst Type.
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select the desired sound set.
CLASSICAL:
CONTEMPORARY:
SOLO:
Classical
Contemporary
Solo
ENHANCED:
SPECIAL 1:
SPECIAL 2:
USER:
Enhanced
Special 1 (Native mode only)
Special 2 (Native mode only)
User (Native mode only)
The sound set has now been selected.
4 . Press [INST] once again to return to the main screen.
2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Se le ctin g a so u n d
If the part type is Inst, use the following procedure to select a sound. First make sure that the part type is
Inst. For details on how to set the part type to Inst, refer to "Selecting the type of part (INST/DRUM)" (p.
24).
On the SD-80, the sound of an Inst part is specified by two numbers: an Instrument number and a
Variation number. There are 128 sounds whose variation number is 000, and these make up the basic
sounds of the SD-80. These are referred to as “capital sounds.”
By changing the MIDI bank number of these sounds, you can select variations that have a different tonal
character. These are called “variation sounds.” For details on the various sounds that can be selected,
refer to "Instrument list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 95).
fig.5-06
1,6
3,5
2,4
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
fig.5-06a_67.2
2 . Press [PAGE ] until the display indicates Inst
Number.
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select a capital sound.
The sound name and Inst Number shown in the display will also change.
4 . Press [PAGE ] until Variation appears.
In GS mode, this will be displayed with Bank.
5 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select a variation sound.
The sound name and Inst Number shown in the display will also change.
6 . Press [INST] once again to return to the main screen.
Convenient functions
You can also use the following method to select a sound.
After step 1, if you turn the [VALUE] dial, any sound in the current sound set can be selected.
2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Se le ctin g a d ru m se t
If the part type is Drum Set, use the following procedure to select a drum set. First make sure that the part
type is Drum. For details on how to set the part type to Drum, refer to "Selecting the type of part (INST/
DRUM)" (p. 24).
For details on the drum sets that are available, refer to "Instrument list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 95).
*
Drum sets do not have variation sounds.
fig.5-07
1
2
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
fig.5-07a_67.2
2 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to select a drum set. The drum
set name shown in the display will change.
2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Mu tin g / so lo in g a p a rt
You can “mute” a specified part so that it will not sound. This is convenient when you want to play along
to a backing provided by the SD-80 (“minus-one” playing).
Conversely, you can “solo” a specified part so that the remaining parts will be muted.
Here’s how to mute/ solo a part.
*
Solo takes priority between solo and mute settings. This means that if you specify Solo for a part that was previously
muted, Mute will be defeated for that part, and it will be set to Solo. Even if you subsequently cancel Solo, that part
will not return to Mute. If you want to mute that part once again, use the procedure described in “Muting a part.”
● Mu tin g a p a rt
fig.5-08
1,4
2
3
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
2 . Press [PART ] or [PART ] to select the part that you want to mute.
fig.5-08a_67.2
3 . When you hold down [SHIFT] and press [PART ], the
part you selected in step 2 will be muted. The bar graph
of a muted part will be displayed as shown in the
diagram at right.
When you press [SHIFT]+[PART ] once again, muting will be defeated.
2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
● So lo in g a p a rt
When multiple parts are sounding, you can cause only the currently selected part to sound, allowing you
to check the performance of that part. This is referred to as “soloing” the part.
fig.5-09
1,4
2
3
1 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
2 . Press [PART ] or [PART ] to select the part that you want to solo.
fig.5-09a
3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [PART ] to solo the part
you selected in step 2. Parts other than the soloed part
will not sound, nor will the bar graph be displayed.
Solo will be defeated when you press [SHIFT]+[PART ] once again.
2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Ab o u t p a ra m e te rs
This section explains the parameters (items that you can set). Parameters are settings that determine how
a sound is produced, and the process of modifying the values of the parameters is called “editing.”
If you are using the SD-80 in GM2 mode or Native mode, some of the Part parameter values can be
edited from the panel of the SD-80 itself. In other modes, parameter values cannot be edited from the
panel of the SD-80. However, the parameters can be edited by using the editing functionality of your
computer software or sequencer.
For details on how to edit the parameters, refer to the “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the
included CD-ROM. The adjustable range of each parameter is printed in this manual as described in the
comment column of the MIDI implementation.
In te rn a l o p e ra tio n o f p a ra m e te rs
When you select a sound, the sound data is loaded into a memory location called the “temporary area.”
The SD-80 produces sound based on the data in this temporary area.
fig.5-14
When you edit a sound or drum set, you are temporarily
modifying the settings of the data in the temporary area. It is
Internal sounds
not possible for the edited sounds to be saved in the
internal memory of the SD-80. Your edits will be lost when
Called up
you turn off the power. If you want to preserve the edited
state, you can either make a note of the settings, or save
them on an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI sequencer
("Writing/loading SD-80 settings" (p. 69)).
Temporary area
3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Ed itin g th e p a ra m e te rs
Parameters can be controlled from the SD-80's panel only in GM2 mode and Native mode.
Of the parameters that can be controlled from the SD-80, only MFX settings that were edited in Native
mode can be saved within the SD-80 as a user patch ("Saving a patch" (p. 50)).
Chorus/ reverb settings and part parameters will be lost when the SD-80 is powered-off. We recommend
that you store these settings in a sequencer program or on an external MIDI sequencer, by using
individual data transmission ("Writing/loading SD-80 settings" (p. 69)).
● Ed itin g p a rt p a ra m e te rs
You can change the way in which the sound selected for a part will be heard, to adjust the sound ideally
for your performance. Part parameters include parameters that adjust the volume, tonal character, and
pitch.
fig.5-10
2,7
1 . Make sure that the sound generator mode is set to either GM2 or Native.
(● "Switching the sound generator mode" (p. 22).
2 . Press [INST].
The button will light.
3 . Select the part and sound.
(● "Selecting a part" (p. 23) and "Selecting a sound" (p. 26))
fig.5-10a_67.2
4 . After you have selected the part and sound, press
[PAGE ] or [PAGE ] to access the parameter that you
want to edit.
5 . Turn the [VALUE] dial.
The value of the parameter you selected in step 4 will change.
6 . If you want to keep the results of your editing, hold down [SHIFT] and press [ENTER] after step 5. The
current setting will be transmitted from the USB connector ("USB mode" (p. 19)) or the MIDI OUT
connector ("MIDI mode" (p. 20)).
7 . Press [INST] once again to return to the main screen.
*
If you want to transmit the state of the sound generator to an external MIDI device all at once, use Bulk Dump. For
details on Bulk Dump, refer to "Transmitting a bulk dump" (p. 69).
3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
● Ed itin g p a ra m e te rs th a t a re co m m o n to a ll p a rts
Here’s an example of how to edit parameters that are common to all parts.
fig.5-12
5
1
3
2
4
1 . Simultaneously press [PART ] and [PART ].
A screen will appear in which you can edit parameters for all parts.
fig.5-12a_67.2
2 . Press [PAGE ] or [PAGE ] to select the parameter that
you want to edit (e.g., Master Volume).
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to adjust the value of the
parameter you selected in step 2.
4 . If you want to keep the results of your edit, hold down [SHIFT] and press [ENTER] after step 3. The
current setting will be transmitted from the USB connector ("USB mode" (p. 19)) or the MIDI OUT
connector ("MIDI mode" (p. 20)).
5 . Press [INST] to return to the main screen.
3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Ab o u t p a ra m e te rs th a t ca n b e e d ite d fro m th e SD-8 0 ’s p a n e l
The following parameters can be edited from the panel in GM2 mode or Native mode.
Parameter name
Parameter name
Modulation Depth
Inst Type
Volume
Panpot
Portamento SW
TVF Resonance
Portamento Time
TVF Cutoff
Release Time
Attack Time
Decay Time
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Reverb Send Level
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
Coarse Tune
Scale/ Octave Tuning Adjust
Legato SW
Part Keyboard Fade Width Lower
Part Keyboard Range Upper
Part Dry Send Level
Part Output Assign
Master Fine Tuning
Chorus Send Level
Fine Tune
Mono/ Poly Mode
RX Channel
Part Velocity Sens Offset
Part Keyboard Range Lower
Part Keyboard Fade Width Upper
Part Output MFX Select
Master Volume
Master Coarse Tuning
On the SD-80, parameter values are specified for the Part. In other words, these parameters belong to the
part, and not to the sound (instrument). For example, if you set Vibrato Rate to +20 and then select a
different sound for that part, the Vibrato Rate of the newly selected sound will stay at +20, and will not be
the default setting of +/ -0. Parts that belong to the Part in this way are called “part parameters.”
● Pa rt p a ra m e te rs (GM2 m o d e , N a tive m o d e )
Inst Type
INST, DRUM
The part mode can be switched between Inst and Drum Set.
Select INST for parts that will play conventional instrumental sounds (Inst parts). Select DRUM for parts
that will play percussion or drum sounds (Drum parts). For a drum part, each different MIDI note
number will play a different sound (instrument), allowing you to play a variety of percussion instrument
sounds from a single part ("Drum set list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 105)).
Each part 1–16 can be set either as an Inst part (to play a conventional sound), or a Drum part (to play a
drum set).
Modulation Depth
0–10–127
Specifies the depth of vibrato.
Volume [cc#7]
0–100–127
Adjusts the volume of each part. Increasing this value will make the sound louder. The overall volume of
the entire SD-80 is adjusted by the [VOLUME] knob. If the [VOLUME] knob is set to the minimum
position, there will be no sound even if you raise this level parameter.
Panpot [cc#10]
L64–0–63R
Adjusts the pan (localization of the sound image; effective when stereo output is used) of the part.
For some sounds, a small amount of sound may be heard from the opposite speaker even if this parameter is set to far
right or far left.
*
*
In a drum set, the pan setting of each individual percussion sound is fixed. When you edit the pan setting of a drum
part, the overall panning of the entire drum set will change.
3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Portamento SW [cc#65]
ON/OFF, (PATCH: Native mode only)
0–127, (PATCH: Native mode only)
Turn this ON when you want to use portamento.
Portamento Time [cc#5]
Adjusts the time over which the next pitch will be reached.
Portamento is a function that changes the pitch smoothly from one note to the next.
Portamento will be switched on/ off when a Portamento message is received. Portamento Time specifies
the speed of the pitch change. A Portamento Control message can be received to specify the “source note
number” (the previously played note).
*
When you apply portamento by playing a note that is below the currently played note, the range of the effect may be
limited (approximately two octaves).
Filte r
You can adjust the tonal character of the sound by editing the filter values. The filters of the SD-80 are a
type called Low Pass Filters, which pass the region of sound that lies below a specified frequency. This
frequency is called the Cutoff Frequency. By adjusting the cutoff frequency, you can make the sound
brighter or darker.
The cutoff frequency will also change over time according to an envelope. By adjusting the filter and
envelope, you can create sounds that have movement and expression.
fig.p8-1j
Higher frequencies
Low
pass
filter
Cutoff frequency
Lower frequencies
TVF Resonance [cc#71]
-64–0–+63
Increasing the resonance value will emphasize the harmonics in the region of the cutoff frequency, giving
a distinctive character to the sound.
*
For some sounds, negative (-) settings of Resonance will not produce any audible difference.
fig.p8-2j
Level
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
Low
High
Resonance
TVF Cutoff Freq (TVF Cutoff Frequency) [cc#74] -64–0–+63
Sets the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Positive (+) settings for the Brightness parameter will raise the cutoff frequency. Negative (-) settings will
lower the cutoff frequency. Increasing this value in the positive direction will pass more of the high-
frequency component, making the sound brighter (harder). Increasing this value in the negative direction
will cut more of the high-frequency component, making the sound more mellow (darker).
*
For some sounds, positive (+) settings of TVF Cutoff Freq will not produce any audible difference.
3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
En ve lo p e
fig.p8-3j
The sound of a musical instrument changes over time from the
moment the note begins until it ends. Such change can be expressed
by the graph shown below. The shape of this change is distinctive of
that particular instrument, and is an important factor that allows us
to recognize the type of instrument. This shape is called the
“envelope.”
Low pass filter characteristics
Level
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
fig.p9-1j
The envelope of a musical instrument sound will
A: Attack time
D: Decay time
R: Release time
change depending on how the instrument is played. For
Cutoff frequency
example, when a trumpet is blown strongly, the sound
will have a sharp and rapid attack, but when blown
gently, the attack will be softer.
Envelope
Sound ends
To adjust the sharpness of the attack, you can edit the
Attack Time of the envelope. By adjusting the envelope
parameters in this way, you can express a wide variety
of the characteristics of an instrument.
Time
Level
A
D
R
Note On
Note Off
The shape of the envelope that you specify in this way
will also affect the movement of the cutoff frequency.
If the cutoff frequency is lowered, it will rise as the envelope rises and fall as the envelope falls.
Release Time (TVF&TVA Release) [cc#72] -64–0–+63
This adjusts the time from when you release the key (note-off message) until the sound decays to silence.
The cutoff frequency will also fall accordingly.
Attack Time (TVF&TVA Attack) [cc#73]
-64–0–+63
This adjusts the sharpness with which the note begins.
Decay Time (TVF&TVA Decay) [cc#75]
-64–0–+63
This adjusts the time from when the attack has been completed until the sustain level is reached (figure 1).
*
*
For some sounds, the sustain level is 0 (figure 2). For example, this is the case for piano or guitar-type sounds.
For some sounds, adjusting the various envelope times may not make any audible difference.
fig.p9-2j
figure 1
Volume
Sounds ends
Sustain Level
Time
A
D
R
Note Off
Note On
figure 2
A: Attack time
D: Deacy time
R: Release time
Volume
Sounds ends
Time
A
D
Note Off
Note On
3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Vib ra to
fig.p7-1j
Delay
Vibrato is an effect that cyclically modulates the
pitch. By applying vibrato, you can make your
performance more expressive.
Depth
Note On
Rate
Vibrato Rate [cc#76]
-64–0–+63
This adjusts the speed (frequency) at which the pitch is modulated. Positive (+) settings will speed up the
modulation, and negative (-) settings will slow down the modulation.
Vibrato Depth [cc#77]
-64–0–+63
This adjusts the depth at which the pitch is modulated. Positive (+) settings will increase the depth of
pitch modulation, and negative (-) settings will decrease the depth.
Vibrato Delay [cc#78]
-64–0–+63
This adjusts the time to pass before vibrato begins. Positive (+) settings will lengthen the time before
vibrato begins, and negative (-) settings will shorten the time.
Reverb Send Level [cc#91]
0–40–127
This sets the depth of reverb for the part.
Chorus Send Level [cc#93]
0–127
This sets the depth of chorus for the part.
PitchBendSens (Pitch Bend Sensitivity)
0– +/-2–+/ -24, (PATCH: Native mode only))
This specifies the maximum change in pitch that can be controlled by pitch bend. A setting of 12 allows
one octave of change, and a setting of 24 allows two octaves of change. With a setting of 0, pitch bend will
not affect the pitch at all.
Fine Tune (Channel Fine Tuning) -50–0–+50
Use this when you want to make fine adjustments to the pitch of an individual part. Positive (+) settings
will raise the pitch, and negative (-) settings will lower the pitch. By setting two or more parts to the same
MIDI channel and instrument, and using Fine Tune to slightly spread apart the pitch of each part, you can
play these parts together to create rich and spacious sounds.
*
To adjust the pitch of all parts together, edit the Master Fine Tune setting (p. 38).
Coarse Tune (Channel Coarse Tuning) -64–0–+63
The Channel Coarse Tuning parameter transposes (shifts the key of) an individual part.
“Transpose” means to change the pitch in steps of a semitone. For example, when playing song data from
your sequencer software, you can make the song play in another key without changing the settings of
your software. Or if you want to sing along with the song data playback but the pitch is too high or too
low, you can edit this parameter to transpose the pitch to a comfortable range.
Each step up (down) will raise (lower) the pitch by one semitone. This means that a setting of 12 will
transpose the pitch one octave. With a setting of 0, the pitch will not be changed.
*
To transpose all parts together, use Master Coarse Tuning (p. 38).
Mono/Poly (Mono/Poly mode) [cc#126/127] Poly, Mono, (PATCH: Native mode only)
If this is set to Mono mode, the instrument of that part will play only one note at a time. Using Mono
mode is effective for parts that play naturally monophonic instruments such as trumpet or sax. Select Poly
mode for parts that will be playing chords.
*
For a drum part, switching between mono/poly modes will not affect the sound.
Scale/Octave Tuning Adjust -64–0–+63
Scale Tuning is a function that lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch of each note in the octave. You
can make one octave of settings, and these settings will adjust the pitch of all octaves in the same way.
Scale Tune allows you to play scales other than the conventional equal tempered scale.
3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
● Pa rt p a ra m e te rs (N a tive m o d e )
In addition to the Part parameters described in the preceding pages, Native mode also allows you to
adjust the following parameters.
Rx Channel (Receive channel)
1–16, OFF
This specifies the MIDI channel that is assigned to the part. If this is turned OFF for a part, all MIDI
messages other than system exclusive messages will be ignored by that part, meaning that it will not
sound.
Legato SW [CC#68]
ON/OFF, (PATCH: Native mode only)
Turn this ON when you want to use legato, and OFF if you do not. Legato is a function that is valid when
MONO mode is selected for the part. If Legato is ON, pressing a note while the previous note is still held
down will cause the sound to be maintained while it shifts to the pitch of the newly pressed note. This lets
you simulate performance techniques such as the “hammering-on” and “pulling-off” used by guitarists.
Part Velocity Sens Offset (Part Velocity Sensitivity Offset) -63–0–+63
This adjusts the degree to which playing dynamics will affect the volume and cutoff frequency.
Part Keyboard Fade Width Lower
0–127
This specifies how the volume will change when you play notes that are outside the lower limit of the
part’s key range. With higher settings of this parameter, the volume will decrease gradually. If you want
there to be no sound at all when you play below the specified key range, set this to 0.
Part Keyboard Range Lower
C-1–UPPER
Specifies the lowest note of the keyboard range for the part.
Part Keyboard Range Upper
LOWER–G9
Specifies the highest note of the keyboard range for the part.
Part Keyboard Fade Width Upper
0–127
This specifies how the volume will change when you play notes that are outside the upper limit of the
part’s key range. With higher settings of this parameter, the volume will decrease gradually. If you want
there to be no sound at all when you play above the specified key range, set this to 0.
fig.5-15
*
It is not possible to set the Lower Range above the
Level
Note number
Upper Range, nor the Upper Range below the
Lower. If you attempt to do so, the Lower and
Upper values will change together.
0
Lower
Upper
127
U.Fade value
L.Fade value
3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the internal sound generator
Part Output Assign
MFX, 1, 2, 1L, 1R, 2L, 2R, PATCH
This specifies where the output signal of the part will be sent.
MFX:
1:
Output to MFX.
Output the unprocessed sound from OUTPUT 1, without using MFX.
Output the unprocessed sound from OUTPUT 2, without using MFX.
Output the unprocessed sound from the L jack of OUTPUT 1.
Output the unprocessed sound from the R jack of OUTPUT 1.
Output the unprocessed sound from the L jack of OUTPUT 2.
Output the unprocessed sound from the R jack of OUTPUT 2.
The settings of the patch (instrument) will be applied. If the patch is set to use MFX, the
sound will be sent to MFX. If not, the DRY sound will be output.
2:
1L:
1R:
2L:
2R:
PATCH:
*
Select 1L, 1R, 2L, or 2R when you want to use the output jacks as four parallel outputs.
PART Output MFX Select MFX-A, MFX-B, MFX-C
If MFX is selected for Part Output Assign, select one of the three MFX units to which the sound will be
sent.
PART Dry Send Level
0–127
This specifies the level of the output to the output destination you’ve selected for Part Output Assign.
● Pa ra m e te rs co m m o n to a ll p a rts (GM2 m o d e , N a tive m o d e )
The following parameters common to all parts can be edited from the panel of the SD-80.
Master Volume
0–127
Adjusts the volume of all parts. Increasing this value will increase the volume.
The basic overall volume of the SD-80 is adjusted with the [VOLUME] knob. If the [VOLUME] knob is set
to the minimum position, there will be no sound even if you use this parameter to raise the volume.
Master Fine Tuning
415.3–440.0–466.2 Hz
When you are playing in an ensemble with other instruments, or want to adjust the SD-80 to the tuning of
another instrument, you can adjust the Master Tuning in a range from 415.3 Hz to 466.2 Hz. The
displayed value (for example 440.0 Hz) is the frequency of the A4 note (note number 69).
Master Coarse Tuning
-24–0–+24
This parameter transposes the pitch of all parts in semitone steps. For example, when using your
sequencer software to play song data, this parameter can be adjusted to change the key without having to
change the settings of your software. As another example, you can adjust this parameter to transpose the
pitch to a comfortable range when you want to sing along with song data that is too high or too low for
your voice.
Increasing (decreasing) this value by one will raise (lower) the pitch by one semitone. Thus, a setting of 12
will change the pitch by one octave. With a setting of 0, the pitch will not be transposed. This parameter
lets you adjust the pitch in semitone steps over a range of +/ -2 octaves.
*
The pitch of drum parts will not change even if you adjust the Master Coarse Tuning to transpose all parts.
3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usin g th e e ffe cts o f th e in te rn a l so u n d g e n e ra to r
Ab o u t th e so u n d g e n e ra to r e ffe cts
The SD-80 contains the following four effects processors, and each can be set independently.
Ch o ru s
Chorus is an effect that adds depth and spaciousness to the sound.
Re ve rb
Reverb is an effect that adds the reverberation typically heard in a concert hall.
Eq u a lize r
This is an effect that boosts or cuts the level of specific frequency bands of the sound, modifying its tonal
character.
Mu lti-e ffe ct
Multi-effect provides 90 different effect types. These include single effects such as distortion and delay, as
well as multiple types that combine two or more effects. Chorus and reverb are additionally provided as
multi-effect effect types, but you can also use the separate chorus and reverb units to apply these effects.
On the SD-80, you can use three of these multi-effects independently.
3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
Ed itin g th e so u n d g e n e ra to r e ffe cts
You can edit the sound generator effects when the sound generator mode is either GM2 mode or Native
mode.
fig.6-01b
2
4
1 . Switch the sound generator to GM2 mode or Native mode. For details on switching the sound generator
mode, refer to "Switching the sound generator mode" (p. 22).
2 . Press [EFFECT]. The sound generator Effect Edit screen will appear.
3 . Press [PAGE ] or [PAGE ] to select the parameter that
you want to edit.
*
MFX cannot be selected if the sound generator mode is GM2
mode.
4 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to modify the value of the parameter you selected in step 4. This completes the
steps needed to edit an effect parameter.
4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
Pa ra m e te rs th a t ca n b e e d ite d in GM2 m o d e
The sound generator effect parameters that can be edited using the SD-80’s controls will differ depending
on the sound generator mode (GM2 or Native). In the SD-80’s GM2 mode, you can edit the reverb and
chorus parameters. The following parameters can be edited.
● Re ve rb (Sy ste m Effe ct)
This includes parameters that specify the type of reverb, how the reverb sound will be heard, and how it
will be output.
Reverb Type
Selection for the type of reverb.
Type
Explanation
Small Room
Medium Room
Large Room
Medium Hall
Large Hall
Plate
This reverb simulates the reverberation of a room. It produces a crisp and spacious re-
verberation.
This reverb simulates the reverberation of a hall. It produces a deeper sensation than
Room.
This simulates a plate echo (a reverb unit that uses the vibration of a metal plate).
Reverb Time
0–127
Specifies the duration of the reverb. Higher settings will produce a longer reverb time. The default setting
will depend on the Reverb Type setting.
Reverberation
time (seconds)
Type
Default setting
Small Room
Medium Room
Large Room
Medium Hall
Large Hall
Plate
44
50
56
64
64
50
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.3
● Ch o ru s (Sy ste m Effe ct)
Chorus Type
Selection for the type of chorus. The default setting of each parameter will depend on the Chorus Type.
Type
Explanation
Chorus 1
Chorus 2
Chorus 3
Chorus 4
FB Chorus
Flanger
A conventional chorus effect that adds spaciousness and depth to the sound.
A chorus with a flanger-like character, producing a fresh sound.
Produces a sound reminiscent of a jet airplane taking off and landing.
Type
Feedback
0 (0%)
5 (4%)
Mod Rate
3 (0.4 Hz)
9 (1.1 Hz)
3 (0.4 Hz)
9 (1.1 Hz)
2 (0.2 Hz)
1 (0.1 Hz)
Mod Depth
5 (1.9 ms)
19 (6.3 ms)
19 (6.3 ms)
16 (5.3 ms)
24 (7.8 ms)
5 (1.9 ms)
Rev Send
0 (0%)
0 (0%)
0 (0%)
0 (0%)
0 (0%)
0 (0%)
Chorus 1
Chorus 2
Chorus 3
Chorus 4
FB Chorus
Flanger
8 (6%)
16 (12%)
64 (49%)
112 (86%)
4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
Mod Rate (Modulation Rate)
0–127
Specifies the speed (frequency) at which the chorus sound will be modulated. Higher settings produce
faster modulation.
Mod Depth (Modulation Depth)
0–127
Specifies the depth of modulation for the chorus sound. Higher settings will produce deeper modulation.
Feedback
0–127
Specifies the level of the chorus sound that will be re-input to the chorus (i.e., the amount of feedback).
Feedback lets you produce a denser chorus sound. Increasing this value will raise the feedback level.
Send to Reverb
0–127
Specifies the amount of chorus sound that will be sent to reverb. Higher settings will increase the amount
that is sent to reverb.
● EQ (Eq u a lize r)
You can make equalizer settings for the output of the sound generator section.
EQ1L:
EQ1R:
EQ2L:
EQ2R:
EQ for the left channel (Lch) of the OUTPUT 1 stereo output
EQ for the right channel (Rch) of the OUTPUT 1 stereo output
EQ for the left channel (Lch) of the OUTPUT 2 stereo output
EQ for the right channel (Rch) of the OUTPUT 2 stereo output
EQ Switch
Off, On
Switches the equalizer on/ off.
EQ1 Low Frequency
EQ2 Low Frequency
200/400 Hz
200/400 Hz
Specify the frequency at which the low range will be adjusted.
EQ1 Low Gain
EQ2 Low Gain
-15–+15
-15–+15
Specify the gain (amount of boost or cut) of the low range. Increasing this setting in the positive direction
will emphasize the low range.
EQ1 High Frequency
EQ2 High Frequency
2000/4000/8000 Hz
2000/4000/8000 Hz
Specify the frequency at which the high range will be adjusted.
EQ1 High Gain
EQ2 High Gain
-15–+15 dB
-15–+15 dB
Specify the gain (amount of boost or cut) of the high range. Increasing this setting in the positive direction
will emphasize the high range.
4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
Pa ra m e te rs th a t ca n b e e d ite d in N a tive m o d e
The sound generator effect parameters that can be edited using the front panel of the SD-80 will differ
depending on the sound generator mode (GM2 or Native mode). In the SD-80’s Native mode, you can
edit the parameters of the two system effects and three MFX (multi-effects). The following parameters can
be edited.
● Re ve rb (Sy ste m Effe ct)
This includes parameters that specify the type of reverb, how the reverb will be sounded, and how it will
be output.
Reverb Type
Selection for the type of reverb. The parameters that can be edited will depend on the Reverb Type.
Type
Explanation
0 (OFF)
Reverb will not be used.
1 (Reverb)
2 (SRV Room)
3 (SRV Hall)
4 (SRV Plate)
5 (GM2)
Basic reverb.
Reverb that simulates the reverberation of a room in greater detail.
Reverb that simulates the reverberation of a hall in greater detail.
Reverb that simulates a plate echo (a reverb device that uses a metal plate).
This is the same as GM2 reverb.
Reverb Level
0–127
Specifies the output level of the signal that has passed through the reverb.
Reverb Source
COMMON, PART 1–32
Reverb parameters (reverb type, reverb time, etc.) exist both outside the sound (COMMON) and within
the sound (PATCH). This setting specifies which set of parameters the reverb unit will use.
Output Assign
1, 2
Selects the output jacks for the reverb. You can select either OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 stereo outputs.
W h e n Re ve rb Ty p e is se t to 1 (Re ve rb )
The following parameters can be edited when Reverb Type is set to 1 (Reverb).
Type (Reverb/Delay Type)
Specifies the type of reverb (or delay).
Value
Explanation
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
HALL 1
HALL 2
DELAY
Reverb with short duration and high density
Reverb with short duration and low density
Reverb with a greater amount of subsequent reverberation
Reverb with strong early reflections
Reverb with a transparent character
Rich reverb
Conventional delay
PAN-DELAY
Delay with reflections that pan (move) between left and right
Time (Reverb/Delay Time)
0–127
When the Type is ROOM 1–HALL 2 this adjusts the duration of the reverb. When the Type is DELAY or
PAN-DELAY, this specifies the delay time. Increasing this value will produce a more spacious feeling.
4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
HF Damp (Reverb/Delay HF Damp)
Specifies the frequency above which the high-frequency component of the reverb sound will be cut.
Lowering this value will cause a greater portion of the high-frequency range to be cut, producing a softer-
toned reverb sound. If no cutting is desired, set this to BYPASS.
Values:
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000
Hz, BYPASS
Feedback (Delay Feedback)
0–127
When the Type is DELAY or PAN-DELAY, this specifies the amount of delay sound that will be returned
(fed back) to the input of the delay. Raising this value will cause the delay to continue repeating for a
greater number of times.
W h e n Re ve rb Ty p e is 2 (Ro o m ), 3 (SRV Ha ll), o r 4 (SRV Pla te )
Pre Delay (Pre Delay Time)
0.0–100 ms
Specifies the amount of time that is to pass after the original sound is heard before the reverb begins to
sound.
Time (Reverb Time)
0–127
Specifies the length of time over which the reverb sound will decay.
Size
1–8
Adjusts the size of the room/ hall. Higher settings will simulate a larger space.
High Cut (High Cut Frequency)
Specifies the frequency above which the high-frequency component of the final output sound will be cut.
If no cutting is desired, set this to BYPASS.
Range:
160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6400,
8000, 10000, 12500 Hz, BYPASS
Density (Reverb Density)
0–127
Adjusts the density of the reverb sound. Higher settings will produce a denser sound.
Diffusion (Reverb Diffusion)
0–127
Adjusts the way in which the density of the reverb sound will change over time. With higher settings of
this parameter, the sound will become denser as time passes. The effect of this parameter is easy to notice
with longer Reverb Time settings.
LF Damp Freq (LF Damp Frequency)
Specifies the frequency below which the low-frequency component of the reverb sound will be cut.
Range:
50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200,
4000 Hz
LF Damp Gain
-36–0 dB
Adjusts the amount of attenuation for LF Damp. With a setting of “0,” LF Damp will have no effect.
HF Damp Freq (HF Damp Frequency)
Specifies the frequency above which the high-frequency component of the reverb sound will be cut.
Range:
4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12500 Hz
HF Damp Gain
-36–0 dB
Adjusts the amount of attenuation for HF Damp. With a setting of “0,” HF Damp will have no effect.
4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
● Ch o ru s (Sy ste m Effe ct)
On the SD-80, the chorus section can also be used as a delay.
Here you can edit parameters that select either chorus or delay, and specify how the chorus/ delay sound
will be heard and output.
Chorus Type
Selection for the type of chorus (or delay).
Value
Explanation
0 (Off)
Chorus/ delay will not be used.
Chorus will be used.
Delay will be used.
1 (Chorus)
2 (Delay)
3 (GM2)
This is the same as GM2 reverb.
Chorus Output Select
MAIN, REV, MAIN+REV
Specifies the output destination of the signal that has passed through chorus.
figMAIN:
.6-1(MAIN)
Output the signal to the OUTPUT
of the MIDI sound generator
block.
Chorus Input
Chorus Input
Chorus
Output
MAIN:
REV:
fig.6-2(REV)
Chorus
Reverb
Output
Output the signal only to reverb.
fig.6-3(MAIN+REV)
Chorus Input
Reverb Input
Chorus
Output
Output
Output the signal to the OUTPUT
of the MIDI sound generator
block, as well as to reverb.
MAIN+REV:
Reverb
Chorus Level
0–127
Specifies the output level of the signal that has passed through the chorus.
Chorus Parameter 1-12
Edit the chorus parameters.
The parameters that can be edited will depend on the type of chorus/ delay you specified for Chorus
Type.
Chorus Source
COMMON, PART 1–32
Chorus parameters (chorus type, chorus rate, etc.) exist both outside the sound (COMMON) and within
the sound (PATCH). This setting specifies which set of parameters the chorus unit will use.
Output Assign
1, 2
Selects the output jacks for the reverb. You can select either OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 stereo outputs.
W h e n Ch o ru s Ty p e is 1 (CHO RUS)
Rate (Chorus Rate)
0.05–10.00 Hz
Specifies the frequency at which the chorus sound will be modulated.
Depth (Chorus Depth)
0–127
Specifies the depth to which the chorus sound will be modulated.
Feedback (Chorus Feedback)
0–127
Specifies the amount of chorused sound that will be returned (fed back) to the input of the chorus.
Increasing this value will produce a more complex chorus effect.
4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
Phase
0–180 degrees
0.0–100 ms
Specifies the spaciousness of the chorus sound.
Pre Delay (Chorus Pre Delay)
Specifies the amount of time that is to pass after the original sound has been heard before the chorus
sound is heard. Increasing this value heightens the dispersal effect.
Type (Filter Type)
Specifies the type of filter.
Value
OFF
LPF
Explanation
The filter will not be used.
The frequency band above the cutoff frequency setting will be cut.
The frequency band below the cutoff frequency setting will be cut.
HPF
Cutoff freq (Cutoff Frequency)
Specifies the frequency at which the filter will begin cutting the specified frequency band.
Range:
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
W h e n th e Ch o ru s Ty p e is 2 (DELAY)
Center (Delay Center)
200–1000 ms, note value
Specifies the delay time for the delay sound panned to the center.
Left (Delay Left)
200–1000 ms, note value
Specifies the delay time for the delay sound panned to the left.
Right (Delay Right)
200–1000 ms, note value
Specifies the delay time for the delay sound panned to the right.
HF Damp
Specifies the frequency at which the high-frequency portion will be cut for the delay sound that is
returned to the input. If you do not want to cut this sound, select BYPASS.
Range:
200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz,
BYPASS
Feedback
-98–+98%
Specifies the amount of feedback. Changing the amount of feedback will change the number of times that
the delay will repeat. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase of the feedback sound.
Center (Delay Center Level)
0–127
Specifies the level of the delay sound localized at the center.
Left (Delay Left Level)
0–127
Specifies the level of the delay sound localized at the left.
Right (Delay Right Level)
0–127
Specifies the level of the delay sound localized at the right.
● MFX (Mu lti-e ffe cts)
This section explains how to select a multi-effect, and to edit the parameters that determine how the
multi-effect sound is produced and output.
MFX A-C Type (Multi-effect A–C Type)
0–90
Provides for selection among the 90 types of multi-effect. For details on the various effects that are
available, refer to MFX_E.pdf on the included CD-ROM.
MFX A-C Dry Send Level (Multi-effect A–C Dry Send Level)0–127
Specifies the level at which the signal processed by the multi-effect will be output.
4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
MFX A-C Chorus Send Level (Multi-effect A–C Chorus Send Level)0–127
Specifies the level at which the signal processed by the multi-effect will be sent to the Chorus effect.
MFX A-C Reverb Send Level (Multi-effect A–C Reverb Send Level)0–127
Specifies the level at which the signal processed by the multi-effect will be sent to the Reverb effect.
MFX A-C Control 1-4 Source (MFX A–C Control 1–4 Source)
Specifies the control source that will modify the multi-effect parameter, and the sensitivity of the control.
Value
Explanation
OFF
CC01–95
PITCH BEND
AFTERTOUCH
SYS-CTRL 1–4
A controller will not be used.
Controller number 1–95 (except for 32)
Pitch bend
Aftertouch
System control 1–4
MFX A-C Control 1-4 Sens (MFX A–C Control 1–4 Sensitivity)-63–+63
Set this to a positive (+) value if you want to apply changes to the present value in the positive direction
(higher value, toward the right, faster, etc.). Set this to a negative value (-) if you want to apply changes to
the present value in a negative direction (lower value, toward the left, slower, etc.). The greater the value,
the greater the change produced.
MFX A-C Parameter 1-32 (MFX A–C Parameter)
Specifies the parameter of the multi-effect that you want to use. The parameters that can be edited will
depend on the type of multi-effect you select in MFX Type (Multi-effect Type). For details on each effect
parameter, refer to MFX_E.pdf in the included CD-ROM.
Output Assign
1, 2
Selects the MFX output jacks. You can select either OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 stereo outputs.
Usin g MFX in N a tive m o d e
If you switch the sound generator to Native mode, you will be able to control the sound and MFX
independently. In order to apply MFX to the sound of a specific part, you must do the following two
things. These are part parameters. Press the [INST] button, and then use the [PAGE ] button to select the
editing screen.
•
•
Select the location (source) of the parameters used by MFX.
Send the output of the part to MFX.
Se le ct th e lo ca tio n o f th e p a ra m e te rs u se d b y MFX
MFX A SOURCE (MFX A source)
MFX B SOURCE (MFX B source)
MFX C SOURCE (MFX C source)
COMMON, PART 1–32
COMMON, PART 1–32
COMMON, PART 1–32
MFX parameters (e.g., algorithm, reverb type, distortion type) exist both within the sounds (COMMON)
and outside them. For each of the three MFX units, you can specify which parameters the unit will use.
COMMON:
One of the three sets of parameters stored outside the sounds will be used. A part whose
Part Output MFX Select setting is set to MFX will use the effect settings you specify, and
will not be affected by the effect settings of the sound that is called up for that part.
The parameters stored within the sound called up for that part will be used. Parts whose
Part Output MFX Select setting is set to MFX will be processed by the MFX effect
settings of the part referenced by MFX. When another sound is called up for the part that
is referenced, MFX A will operate according to the MFX settings of the newly requested
sound, and the previously mentioned parts will also be processed by these effect settings.
PART 1–32:
4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the effects of the internal sound generator
Sp e cify in g th e o u tp u t d e stin a tio n o f th e p a rt
PART OUTPUT ASSIGN
MFX, 1, 2, 1L, 1R, 2L, 2R, PATCH
Specify where the output signal of the part will be sent.
MFX:
1:
Output to MFX.
Output the unprocessed sound from OUTPUT 1, without using MFX.
Output the unprocessed sound from OUTPUT 2, without using MFX.
Output the unprocessed sound from the L jack of OUTPUT 1.
Output the unprocessed sound from the R jack of OUTPUT 1.
Output the unprocessed sound from the L jack of OUTPUT 2.
Output the unprocessed sound from the R jack of OUTPUT 2.
The settings of the patch (instrument) will be applied. If the patch is set to use MFX, the
sound will be sent to MFX. If not, the DRY sound will be output.
2:
1L:
1R:
2L:
2R:
PATCH:
*
Select 1L, 1R, 2L, or 2R when you want to use the output jacks as four parallel outputs.
PART OUTPUT MFX SELECT MFX A, MFX B, MFX C
Selects which of the three MFX units the sound will be sent to when MFX is selected for Part Output
Assign.
PART DRY SEND LEVEL
Specifies the output level of the part when MFX is not used (i.e., when Part Output Assign is set to DRY).
This setting is ignored when MFX is used.
fig.6-4(mfxã÷é~)
MFX o u tp u t d e stin a tio n
MFX A
MFX B
Only one MFX can be selected as the output destination for
one part. It is not possible to output a part to multiple MFX
units simultaneously, or to send the output of an MFX unit to
another MFX.
MFX A
MFX B
Usin g so u n d s fro m th e En h a n ce d se t in N a tive m o d e
Immediately after the sound generator mode is switched to Native mode, the three MFX will be assigned
to parts 1, 2, and 3, respectively. When you select sounds from the Enhanced set, the effects will be
applied only to parts 1, 2, and 3 unless you change the settings. If you want to use sounds from the
Enhanced set for other parts in Native mode, perform the following steps.
< Example: Using MFX A for part 4>
1 . Set the MFX A Source to PART4. This allows the MFX A effect to be applied with the settings of the
sound that is called up for part 4.
2 . Set the Part 4 Output Assign to PATCH. This selects PATCH as the output destination for the part. Since
the output setting of an Enhanced sound (patch) is set to MFX, calling up the sound to Part 4 will cause the
signal to be output to MFX.
*
You can apply an effect even if Part Output Assign is set to MFX. However, in this case, it will be output in a
fixed manner to MFX even if you call up a sound from a different set to Part 4.
3 . For Part Output MFX Select, specify which of the three MFX units (A–C) you want to use. For this
example, select MFX A.
● EQ (Eq u a lize r)
You can make equalizer settings for the output of the sound generator section.
For details, refer to "EQ (Equalizer)" (p. 42).
4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sy ste m -re la te d se ttin g s
This chapter explains how to make settings that affect the entire system of the SD-80. Here’s the basic
procedure for setting these parameters.
fig.7-1
5
1
3
4
2
1 . Press [SYSTEM].
The button will light.
2 . Press [PAGE ] or [PAGE ] until the item you want to edit appears in the display.
The following parameters can be set in the system screen.
• LCD Contrast
• Write Patch
• Inst Init
• Bulk Dump
• Inst Startup
• Sys.EX Device ID
• Control Output
• Preview Mode
• Preview Note
• Preview Velocity
• System Tempo
• USB Driver
• Factory Reset
3 . Turn the [VALUE] dial to edit the value of the item.
4 . When you have selected the desired value, press [ENTER].
*
Do not turn off the power while the settings are being saved (while the display indicates "Saving ..."). Doing so will
cause all data within the SD-80 to be lost.
5 . Press [INST] to return to the main screen.
4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-related settings
Ad ju stin g th e co n tra st o f th e d isp la y
Immediately after the power is turned on, or after the SD-80 has been used for an extended period, or
depending on the location, the characters and icons in the display screen may be difficult to read. If this
occurs, adjust the contrast of the display ("Adjusting the brightness of the display (Contrast)" (p. 15)).
fig.7-1g
LCD Contrast
1–4–5
This adjusts the contrast (darkness) of the SD-80’s
display. Increasing this value will darken the
characters in the display.
Sa vin g a p a tch
If you have edited the multi-effect (MFX) settings of a sound in Native mode, your changes will be lost
when you turn off the power of the SD-80. Thus, you can save MFX settings for each sound as a user
patch in the SD-80's user memory.
The user patches you save can be recalled from the front panel or via MIDI messages as User set sounds.
If you want to select a User sound via MIDI, transmit a bank select message of CC#00 (MSB) = 87 for an Inst part,
or CC#00 (MSB) = 86 for a Drum part. ("Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI" (p. 53))
*
WritePatch
Inst: U-001--U-128, Drum: U-001--U-016
You can save 128 Inst patches and 16 Drum patches in
the internal memory of the SD-80.
*
WritePatch can be executed only when the sound generator mode is Native mode.
In other cases, the display will indicate "---------", and this cannot be executed.
Sw itch in g th e so u n d g e n e ra to r m o d e (In st In itia lize )
The SD-80 has four sound generator modes: GM2, Native, GS, and XGlite. When you switch the sound
generator mode, the sound generator will also be initialized, as appropriate for that mode.
fig.7-1a
Inst Init
GM2, Native, GS, XGlite
This switches the unit to the sound generator mode
you select here, and initializes the sound generator
appropriately. (● "Switching the sound generator mode (Inst Initialize)" (p. 50))
Inst Init is where you select the sound generator mode that you want to switch to. It does not indicate the current
sound generator mode.
*
Tra n sm ittin g so u n d g e n e ra to r se ttin g s to a n e x te rn a l
MIDI d e vice
The SD-80 can transmit the settings of its sound generator as MIDI data. There are two ways in which
parameters can be transmitted: a group of parameter settings can be transmitted as a bulk dump, or a
single parameter can be transmitted as individual data. ("Writing/loading SD-80 settings" (p. 69)) All
data is transmitted in the form of system exclusive data.
Use bulk dump when you want to save SD-80 settings on an external MIDI device. By transmitting a bulk
dump, you can also set the parameters of two SD-80 units to identical settings. By sending individual data
you can quickly and easily create data (e.g., for a sequencer) without having to look up each system
exclusive message.
5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-related settings
Bulk Dump
A01–A16, B01–B16, COMMON, ALL
fig.7-1ab
Specifies the internal sound generator parameters that
you want to transmit when the bulk dump is
executed.
*
*
Bulk Dump can be carried out only when the sound generator mode is Native mode.
Otherwise, "---" will be displayed, indicating that the feature is unavailable.
A01--A16 and B01--B16 will transmit the part parameters and patch parameters of the selected part. COMMON
will transmit the parameters that are common to all parts, and ALL will transmit all parameters for A01--B16 and
COMMON.
USER AREA
All 128 user patches and 16 user drum sets will be transmitted as bulk data. The transmitted data can be
recorded by your sequencer software, or the like. If you transmit this recorded data back to the SD-80, all
user patches and rhythm sets will be overwritten. Do not turn off the power while the settings are being
written (while the display indicates "Saving...").
*
Use this bulk transmission function to back up your user patches and rhythm sets.
Sp e cify in g th e sta rt-u p so u n d g e n e ra to r m o d e
Inst Startup
GM2, NATIVE, GS
This selects the mode in which the sound generator
will be when the SD-80 is started up.
Se ttin g th e De vice ID N u m b e r
The Device ID Number is an identification number used when receiving and transmitting exclusive
messages. The SD-80 relies on an identical device ID number when transmitting and receiving exclusive
messages. This means that in order to use exclusive messages to transfer data, both devices must be set to
the same device ID number.
The device ID number is a number from 17 to 32. The factory setting is 17.
SysEx. Device ID
17–32
fig.7-1bc
Specifies the device ID number used when the sound
generator mode is Native mode.
*
*
When playing SMF music files produced by Roland/Edirol, you must set the device ID number to 17. Playback will
not be correct if this is not set to 17.
It is not possible to specify a different device ID number for each Part.
Tra n sm ittin g b u tto n / k n o b o p e ra tio n s to a n e x te rn a l
MIDI d e vice
Control Output
ON, OFF
fig.7-1c
Specify whether operations of the SD-80’s own
buttons and knobs will be transmitted to an external
MIDI device.
5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-related settings
Pre vie w se ttin g s
By pressing [PREVIEW] you can audition the currently selected sound. This is called the preview
function.
Here you can make settings for the preview function ("Auditioning the sounds (Preview)" (p. 14)).
Preview Mode
PHRASE, SINGLE
Switches the mode of the Preview function. Select
PHRASE to use phrase preview, or SINGLE to select
single-note preview.
Preview Note
C-1–C4–G9
Specifies the pitch (key) of the note that will be
sounded for single-note preview.
Preview Velocity
0–127
Specifies the volume (velocity) of previews.
Se ttin g th e sy ste m te m p o
System Tempo
20–120–250
fig.7-1h
This sets the tempo of the entire SD-80 system. When
you set the Delay Time of an internal sound generator
effect (MFX) to Clock (Tempo), it will follow the
tempo you specify here.
Sw itch in g th e d rive r
fig.7-1h
USB Driver
VENDOR, GENERIC
Selects the type of driver that will be used when the
SD-80 is connected to your computer.
VENDOR: The dedicated driver provided on the included CD-ROM will be used, allowing stable, high-
speed MIDI transmission and reception. Normally, you should use this driver.
GENERIC: The standard MIDI driver provided by the OS will be used.
Re sto rin g th e fa cto ry se ttin g s
fig.7-1i
Factory Reset
This resets all system parameters of the SD-80 to their
factory-set condition.
5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n tro llin g th e SD-8 0 via MIDI
The functionality of the SD-80’s internal sound generator, mixer, and audio effects can be controlled by
MIDI messages received from the USB connector or MIDI IN connector. This chapter provides various
examples that show how MIDI messages can be used to operate the SD-80.
*
For details on operation via MIDI, refer to “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-ROM.
Co n tro llin g th e in te rn a l so u n d g e n e ra to r
MIDI messages can be used to control the internal sound generator.
● Sw itch in g th e so u n d g e n e ra to r m o d e
You can use MIDI messages to switch the sound generator mode. Transmit one of the following
messages according to the desired sound generator mode. When you switch the sound generator
mode, the sound generator will be initialized.
Sound Generator mode
GM2 mode
Native mode
GS mode
Message
GM2 System On
Native On
GS Reset
XG System On
F0 7E 7F 09 03 F7
F0 41 10 00 48 12 00 00 00 00 00 00 F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7
F0 43 10 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7
XGlite mode
Fe a tu re s o f N a tive m o d e
Native mode allows you to take full advantage of the SD-80’s sound generator structure. Use this mode
when you want to edit the internal sounds or MFX in greater detail. Although this mode lets you control
parameters that cannot be edited in other modes, operations in Native mode are not compatible with
GM2. In other words, song data created in Native mode cannot be reproduced by playing it back
on another GM2 sound generator.
fig.5-01b
MFX Parameter 1
MFX Parameter 2
MFX Parameter 3
MFX A
MFX B
MFX OUT
Instrument
Parameters
Part
Parameters
MFX C
PART 1
DRY OUT
Instrument
Parameters
Part
Parameters
PART 32
Signal Flow
Parameter reference
•
•
In Native mode, MFX and sounds (instruments) can be handled independently. For this reason, simply
selecting an Enhanced sound will not automatically cause MFX to be applied. You will need to edit the
part parameters in order to apply MFX.
You can also apply effects to sounds other than the Enhanced set, or input the signals from multiple
parts into a single MFX.
*
For details on using MFX, refer to "Using the effects of the internal sound generator" (p. 39).
5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
•
•
A greater number of the Part parameters can be edited from the SD-80.
When creating song data, you can select sounds from the Classical/ Contemporary/ Solo/ Enhanced
sound sets simply by specifying the Bank MSB/ LSB and Program Number.
You can use system exclusive messages to control the Patch parameters that create the sound; e.g.,
pitch, TVF (filter), LFO, and envelope.
•
*
For details on the parameters, refer to “Each Multi-Effects Parameters” (MFX_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
•
These sounds are selected individually for each of the 32 parts. Unlike the Part parameters, the sound
(instrument) parameters belong to the sound (not to the Part), meaning that their settings will be
overwritten by the newly selected sound when you switch sounds from the front panel or by using
program change messages. (The Part parameters will remain as they were set.) If you want to use
sound parameters within your song data, you must select the sound before you modify the
parameters.
fig.5-01c
Specify the sound A parameters
and part parameters at the
beginning of the song
Transmit a program change
number during the song to
switch to sound B
Song data
(time)
Sound A
Part
Sound B
Part
parameters
parameters
parameters
parameters
Th e stru ctu re o f th e sy n th e size r
When controlling the sound parameters, it is important to understand the structure of a conventional
music synthesizer (oscillator, TVF, TVA, envelope, LFO). We recommend that you understand the
following concepts before you use the operations described in this section.
fig.5-01d
LFO
WAVE
Provides for selection of the PCM waveform
(wave) that is to form the basis of the sound,
and specifies how its pitch will change.
oscillator
(WAVE)
filter
(TVF)
level
(TVA)
TVF (Time Variant Filter)
Determines how the frequency components
of the sound will change.
Pitch
TVF
TVA
envelope
envelope
envelope
TVA (Time Variant Amplifier)
Specifies how the volume will change, and
set the stereo position.
Control signal
Audio signal
Envelope
Specifies how change will occur over time.
For example if you want to adjust the time over which the sound attacks or decays, you would adjust the
TVA envelope to specify the desired volume changes.
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
Specifies cyclic change (modulation). You can create vibrato by applying LFO to the pitch, “wah” by
applying LFO to the TVF cutoff frequency, or tremolo by applying LFO to the TVA volume.
5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
● Sw itch in g th e so u n d se t
GM2 mode and Native mode each have four sound sets (variations). You can use MIDI messages to
switch between these sound sets.
Sw itch in g th e so u n d se t in GM2 m o d e
In GM2 mode, you can switch the sound set by transmitting a system exclusive message.
<Example> Switch the sound set of Part 1 to the Enhanced set
Transmit the following system exclusive data:
fig.5-00_99
Part (pp):
20H = Part 1
GM2 Instrument
Set Select
:
MIDI Multitimbre Part
Part
Inst Set
3FH = Part 32
Sound set (nn):00H = Classical set
01H = Contemporary set
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 pp 3F] [nn] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
02H = Solo set
(1) Exclusive status
(2) ID (Roland : 41H)
(3) Device ID
(4) Model ID (SD-90 : 00H 48H)
(5) Command ID (Data set : 12H)
(6) Address
(7) Data
(8) Checksum
(9) End of Exclusive
03H = Enhanced set
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation
method, refer to the section “How
to calculate the checksum”
within “MIDI Implementation”
(MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included
CD-ROM.
(pp) specifies the part you want to switch, and (nn) selects the sound set.
Sw itch in g th e so u n d se t in N a tive m o d e
In Native mode, you can switch the sound set by transmitting a Bank Select message. The upper byte
(MSB) of the MIDI bank number will switch the sound set.
MIDI bank number:
CC#00 (MSB) = **
**:
The set will be switched according to the value you insert here (decimal)
80 (50H) = Special 1 set
81 (51H) = Special 2 set
96 (60H) = Classical set
97 (61H) = Contemporary set
98 (62H) = Solo set
99 (63H) = Enhanced set
87 (57H) = User set
After transmitting CC#00, transmit CC#32 (Variation) and PC# (Program Change) messages to switch the
sound ("Switching the sound set in Native mode" (p. 55)).
5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
● Sw itch in g th e ty p e o f p a rt
Sw itch in g th e Pa rt Mo d e in GM2 m o d e
In GM2, transmit a Bank Select message to switch the Part Mode.
MIDI bank number:
CC#00 (MSB) = **
**:
The part mode will be switched according to the value that you insert here (decimal).
121 (79H) = Inst part
120 (78H) = Drum part
Sw itch in g th e Pa rt Mo d e in N a tive m o d e
In Native mode, transmit a Bank Select message to switch the Part mode.
MIDI bank number:
CC#00 (MSB) = **
**:
The part mode will be switched according to the value that you insert here (decimal).
Inst part:
80 (50H) = Special 1 set
81 (51H) = Special 2 set
96 (60H) = Classical set
97 (61H) = Contemporary set
98 (62H) = Solo set
99 (63H) = Enhanced set
87 (57H) = User set
Drum part:
104 (60H) = Classical set
105 (61H) = Contemporary set
106 (62H) = Solo set
107 (63H) = Enhanced set
86 (56H) = User set
Sw itch in g th e Pa rt Mo d e in GS m o d e
In GS mode, the Inst mode and Drum Part are normally set as follows:
Inst part:
Part 1–9, 11–16
Part 10
Drum part:
Transmit system exclusive data to switch the Part Mode.
fig.5-2aj
checksum
data
address
Address:
p:
40 1p 15
nn
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [ 40 1p 15 ] [
] [ ss ] F7
Part number
Data:
00–02 (00 = Normal, 01 = Drum1, 02 = Drum2)
For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
Checksum:
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
<Example> Switching part 11 to a Drum part
Transmit the following system exclusive data.
fig.5-2bj
After specifying the Part Mode, transmit a Program
checksum
data
address
Change to part 11 to select a drum set.
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [ 40 1A 15 ] [ 02 ] [ 0F ] F7
checksum
Drum 2
Part 11
5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Correspondence between actual parts and part numbers in GS mode
Actual part
Part1
Part2
Part3
Part4
Part5
Part6
Part7
Part8
Part number
Actual part
Part9
Part number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Part10
Part11
Part12
Part13
Part14
Part15
Part16
A
B
C
D
E
F
Data:
00H = OFF (Normal part)
01H = Set1 (Drum1)
02H = Set2 (Drum2)
(p) specifies the part you want to switch, and (nn) selects the sound set.
Sw itch in g th e Pa rt Mo d e in XGlite m o d e
Send a message that causes the sound generator to switch to XGlite mode (F0 43 10 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7), and
then use a Bank Select message to select the sound ("Switching sounds" (p. 58)).
5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
● Sw itch in g so u n d s
You can switch the sound (instrument) for each of the SD-80’s parts by transmitting MIDI messages from
sequencer software running on your computer.
Sounds are specified by their Variation number and Instrument number, but the way in which these
numbers are displayed may differ depending on your software. On the SD-80, variation numbers start
from 0, and instrument numbers start from 1.
The variation number corresponds to the MIDI bank number, and the instrument number corresponds to
the MIDI program number.
fig.4-8j
SD-80 Map (Classic set)
Explosion
003
Piano 1d
Piano 1w
Piano 1
001
Lasergun
Machine Gun
GunShot
128
002
001
000
002
001
000
Variation sounds
Capital sounds
Pulse Clav
Clav
Celesta
Glockenspiel
008
009
010
Instrument Number
Ho w to re a d th e in stru m e n t list
The sounds (instruments) built into the SD-80 are listed in the instrument list provided for each sound
generator mode.
• "Instrument list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 95)
• "Instrument list (GS mode)" (p. 101)
• "Instrument list (XGlite mode)" (p. 103)
Two numbers are used to specify a sound; the Instrument number and the Variation number. Sounds
whose variation number is 000 are “capital” sounds, and sounds whose variation number is other than
000 are “variation” sounds.
Each instrument list shows the instrument number, variation number, and the name of the sound.
<Example> Native mode instrument list
fig.4-7
PC
1
LSB
MSB
Classic Set
Voice
MSB
Contemp Set Voice
MSB
Solo Set
Voice
MSB
0
1
2
96
96
96
Piano 1
Piano 1w
Piano 1d
1
1
1
97
97
97
Ac.Piano
Ac.Piano w
Mild Piano
1
1
1
98
98
98
St.Piano 1
St.Piano 1w
European Pf
2
2
4
99
99
99
2
3
4
0
1
96
96
Piano 2
Piano 2w
1
1
97
97
Rock Piano
Rock Piano w
1
1
98
98
St.Piano 2
St.Piano 2w
2
2
99
99
0
1
96
96
Piano 3
Piano 3w
1
1
97
97
E.Grand Pf
E.Grand Pf w
2
2
98
98
SA Piano
SA Piano w
2
2
99
99
0
96
Honky-tonk
2
97
Old Honky
2
98
St.Honky
4
99
1
96
Honky-tonk w
2
97
Old Honky w
2
98
St.Honky w
4
99
PC:
Instrument number (program number)
Variation number (value of controller number 32)
LSB:
Capital sounds (variation number= 0) are printed in bold type.
Sound set number (value of controller number 0)
MSB:
Classic Set: Sound set = Classical set sounds
Contemp Set: Sound set = Contemporary set sounds
Solo Set:
Enhance Set: Sound set = Enhanced set sounds
Voices: Number of voices used by that instrument
Sound set = Solo set sounds
5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Sw itch in g so u n d s in GM2 m o d e
Transmit bank select LSB (CC#32) and program change (PC#).
*
Bank select MSB (CC#00) is used to switch the part mode. Inst part and Drum part correspond to the following
numbers.
Inst part
121(79H)
Drum part
120 (78H)
<Example> Specifying part 11 as a GM2 Inst part (009: Celesta 2)
MIDI CH=
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
11
121
0
... specify MIDI channel 11
... set as a GM2 Inst part
... specify variation number 000
... specify program change number 009
9
Sw itch in g so u n d s in N a tive m o d e
Transmit bank select LSB (CC#32) and program change (PC#).
*
Bank select MSB (CC#0) is used to switch the Part Mode. The number corresponds to Inst part or Drum part as
follows:
Inst part
Drum part
—
—
80 (50H)
81 (51H)
87 (57H)
96 (60H)
97 (61H)
98 (62H)
99 (63H)
Special 1 set
Special 2 set
User set
Classical set
Contemporary set
Solo set
—
—
86 (56H)
104 (68H)
105 (69H)
106 (6AH)
107 (6BH)
User set
Classical set
Contemporary set
Solo set
Enhanced set
Enhanced set
<Example> Specifying part 11 as an Inst part (009: Celesta 2) of the Classical set
MIDI CH=
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
11
96
0
... specify MIDI channel 11
... set as an Inst part of the Classical set
... specify variation number 000
... specify program change number 009
009
Sw itch in g so u n d s in GS m o d e
Transmit bank select MSB and program change.
*
Leave the bank select LSB set at 0.
Actual transmission of MIDI messages
When you input MIDI messages into sequencer software on your computer for transmission to the SD-80,
send the messages in the following order.
1 . Value of control change 0:
2 . Value of control change 32:
3 . Value of program change:
MIDI bank number MSB (variation number)
MIDI bank number LSB (*1)
MIDI program number (instrument number)
(*1)Refer to the explanation of the bank select lower byte (LSB) (see the following section).
The bank select message consists of steps 1 and 2. Bank Select messages are one form of control
change message. Processing of the bank select is suspended until the program change is received.
5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
<Example> If you want to select the sound for variation number 8, instrument number 3 (Piano3 w), transmit
the following data to the SD-80 (given in decimal form).
1 . Value of control change 0:
2 . Value of control change 32:
3 . Value of program change:
008 (upper byte of bank number = variation number: 8)
0
003 (program number = instrument number: 3)
About the bank select lower byte (LSB)
The SD-80 processes the lower byte (LSB) of the bank select message as follows:
Number
0
Processing
Follows the currently-valid GS mode.
<Example> Switching the sound of a part
To switch the sound of part 2 to 017 Organ 1 (variation 000), transmit the following.
MIDI CH =
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
02
000
0
... set the variation number to 000
... set the instrument number to 017
017
<Example> Changing the variation of the part’s sound
To switch the sound of part 1 to 008 Detuned EP1 (variation 008), transmit the following.
MIDI CH =
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
01
008
0
... set the variation number to 008
... set the instrument number to 008
006
<Example> Changing the sound set and variation of the part’s sound
To switch the sound of part 3 to 039 Syn. Bass 3 (variation 008), transmit the following.
MIDI CH =
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
03
008
0
... set the variation number to 008
... set the instrument number to 039
039
6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
● Sw itch in g th e d ru m se t
In the same way as for instruments, you can switch drum sets by transmitting MIDI messages from
sequencer software running on your computer.
The drum set will switch when the program change is received. Transmit the program change
message on the same channel as the MIDI receive channel of the drum part. On the SD-80, the drum set
number corresponds to the program number.
Ho w to re a d th e d ru m se t list
In normal screens, the drum set number and drum set name will be displayed. Drum sounds (drum
instruments) are assigned to each key of the drum set.
The types of drum set built into the SD-80 are listed by number and name in the drum set list for each
• "Drum set list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 105)
• "Drum set list (XGlite mode)" (p. 117)
• "Drum set list (GS mode)" (p. 114)
fig.4-10j
PC 1
PC 9
PC 17
PC 25
PC 26
Standard Set
High Q
Room Set
<-
Power Set
<-
Electric Set
<-
Analog Set
<-
27
28
29
31
33
35
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Full
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
30
32
34
Sticks
Square Click
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Metron Click
Metron Bell
Kick Drum 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Power Kick 2
Elec.Kick 2
Ana.Kick 2
PC
Drum set number (program number)
Keyboard area Note number
<-
—
Same sound as percussion instrument sound of Standard Set 1 (PC 1)
Note number for which no percussion instrument exists
Sw itch in g d ru m se ts in GM2 m o d e
Transmit bank select LSB (CC#32) and program change (PC#).
*
Bank select MSB (CC#00) is used to switch the part mode. Inst part and Drum part correspond to the following
numbers.
Inst part
121(79H)
Drum part
120(78H)
<Example> Specifying part 10 as a GM2 drum part (009:Room Set 2)
MIDI CH=
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
10
120
0
... set as a GM2 drum part
... specify variation number 000
... specify program change number 009
9
6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Sw itch in g d ru m se ts in N a tive m o d e
Transmit bank select LSB (CC#32) and program change (PC#).
*
Bank select MSB (CC#0) is used to switch the Part Mode. Inst part and Drum part correspond to the following
numbers.
Inst part
80 (50H)
81 (51H)
87 (57H)
96 (60H)
97 (61H)
98 (62H)
99 (63H)
Drum part
—
—
86 (56H)
104 (60H)
105 (61H)
106 (62H)
107 (63H)
Special 1 set
Special 2 set
User set
Classical set
Contemporary set
Solo set
—
—
User set
Classical set
Contemporary set
Solo set
Enhanced set
Enhanced set
<Example> Specifying part 10 as a Classical set drum part (009: Room Set)
MIDI CH=
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
10
104
0
... specify as a Classical set drum part
... specify variation number 000
9
... specify program change number 009
Sw itch in g d ru m se ts in GS m o d e
In GS mode, part 10 is specified as a drum part (MIDI receive channel: 10). The note data in the rhythm
data you are playing must match the note numbers of the drum set you are using.
fig.4-11e
Drum Set name and Drum Set number (Program number)
STANDARD 1
001
ROOM
009
TR-808
026
User Set
065
User Set
066
<Example> Switching the drum set
Transmit the following to set part 10 sound to 009: Room.
MIDI CH =
CC#00
CC#32
PC#
10
000
0
... specify variation number 000
... specify drum set number 009: Room
009
6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
● Ed itin g MIDI e ffe ct p a ra m e te rs
Ed itin g th e re ve rb (in GM2 m o d e )
To edit the reverb via MIDI messages, transmit the following system exclusive data (global parameter
control).
F0 7F 10 04 05 01 01 01 01 01 pp vv F7
pp:
vv:
Parameter number
Value (setting)
VV (setting)
00
01
02
03
04
08
Small Room
Medium Room
Large Room
Medium Hall
Large Hall
Plate
pp = 0
(Reverb Type)
pp = 1
(Reverb Time)
00–7F (0–127)
<Example> Setting the reverb type to 04 Large Hall
Transmit the following system exclusive.
F0 7F 10 04 05 01 01 01 01 01 00 04 F7
Ed itin g th e ch o ru s (in GM2 m o d e )
To edit the chorus via MIDI messages, transmit the following system exclusive data (global parameter
control).
F0 7FH 10 04 05 01 01 01 01 02 pp vv F7
pp:
vv:
Parameter number
Value (setting)
VV (setting)
Chorus1
Chorus2
Chorus3
Chorus4
FB Chorus
Flanger
00
01
02
03
04
05
pp = 0
(Chorus Type)
pp = 1
(Mod Rate)
pp = 2
(Mod Depth)
pp = 3
00–7F (0–127)
(Feedback)
pp = 4
(Send To Reverb)
<Example> Setting the chorus type to 3 Chorus4
Transmit the following system exclusive data.
F0 7F 10 04 05 01 01 01 02 01 00 03 F7
6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Ch a n g in g th e MFX ty p e (N a tive m o d e )
fig.8-04_99
To change the effect type of the enhanced sounds
Patch Common
MFX1
selected for parts 1–3, transmit the following system
exclusive message.
MFX Type
MFX Type Number
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [p1 p2 06 00] [tt] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Exclusive status
(2) ID (Roland : 41H)
(3) Device ID
(4) Model ID (SD-90 : 00H 48H)
(5) Command ID (Data set : 12H)
(6) Address
(7) Data
(8) Checksum
(9) End of Exclusive
Address (p1 p2): when changing the insertion effect of part 1 = 11 00
when changing the insertion effect of part 2 = 11 20
when changing the insertion effect of part 3 = 11 40
:
Data (tt):
Effect type number
For details on effect types, refer to "MFX parameter list" (p. 80), and to “Each Multi-
Effects Parameters” (MFX_E.pdf) on the included CD-ROM. No effect is assigned to
Effect Type number 00 (THROUGH).
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
*
This is valid if the part 1--3 Part Output Assign and Part Output MFX Select (p. 38) have not been changed
since a Native Reset message was received.
<Example> Specifying 14: STEREO CHORUS as the effect of an enhanced sound for part 2
fig.8-05_99
Transmit the following system exclusive data.
Patch Common
MFX1
Multitimbre
MFX Type
Mode Part 1
MFX Type Number
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [11 20 06 00] [0E] [3B] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Usin g MFX w ith o th e r p a rts (N a tive m o d e )
By transmitting the following system exclusive message, the insertion effect used by the enhanced sounds
selected for parts 1–3 can be used by other parts. The output of all parts that use that MFX will be mixed
and sent to the MFX.
•
•
Do not change the MFX source of the three insertion effects after a Native Reset message is received.
This will not work if effect type 00 (no effect: THROUGH) has been specified for the enhanced sounds
selected for parts 1–3.
•
Any control performed on the MFX will apply equally to all parts that use that MFX.
fig.8-06_99
1 . Transmit Output Select = MFX to specify MFX as the
output of the part.
Part
Output
Assign 00 (=MFX)
Address (pp): when using the MFX for part 1 = 20
when using the MFX for part 2 = 21
:
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 pp 1F] [00] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
when using the MFX for part 32 = 3F
6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Data:
00 (output assign = MFX)
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to “How to calculate the checksum” in
“MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-ROM.
fig.8-07_99
2 . Transmit “Part Output MFX Select” to specify the
Part
Temporary
Multitimbre
Part Output
MFX Select
MFX (MFX A–MFX C) to which the output of the part
will be sent.
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 pp 20] [nn] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (pp): when using the MFX for part 1 = 20
when using the MFX for part 2 = 21
:
when using the MFX for part 32 = 3F
Data (nn):
when the desired effect (MFX) is used by the enhanced sound of part 1 = 00 (MFX A)
when the desired effect (MFX) is used by the enhanced sound of part 2 = 01 (MFX B)
when the desired effect (MFX) is used by the enhanced sound of part 3 = 02 (MFX C)
<Example> Making the sound of part 6 use MFX C which is being used by the enhanced sound of part 3
Transmit the following system exclusive data.
1 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 25 1F 00 2C F7
2 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 25 20 02 29 F7
Sh a rin g a n MFX b e tw e e n m u ltip le p a rts
Here’s how an MFX can be shared by more than one part.
*
When an MFX is shared by more than one part, the effect setting of the enhanced sound of the part using that MFX
will be ignored.
fig.8-08_99
1 . Make the MFX use the settings of the multitimbre
Multitimbre MFX 00
Common Source (=Common)
(common to all parts).
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 00 mm] [01] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (mm): when you want to use MFX A from multiple parts = 30
when you want to use MFX B from multiple parts = 31
when you want to use MFX C from multiple parts = 32
Data:
01 (MFX Source = COMMON)
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
fig.8-06_99
2 . Transmit Output Assign = MFX to specify MFX as the
Part
Output
output of the part.
Assign 00 (=MFX)
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 pp 1F] [00] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (mm): when you want part 1 to use the MFX = 20
when you want part 2 to use the MFX =21
:
when you want part 32 to use the MFX =3F
00 (Output Assign = MFX)
Data:
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to “How to calculate the checksum” in
“MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-ROM.
6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
fig.8-07_99
3 . Transmit “Part Output MFX Select” to specify the
Part
Temporary
Multitimbre
Part Output
MFX Select
MFX (MFX A–MFX C) to which the part output will be
sent.
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 pp 20] [nn] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (pp):
Data (nn):
when you want part 1 to use the MFX =20
when you want part 2 to use the MFX =21
:
when you want part 32 to use the MFX =3F
when you want to use MFX A =00
when you want to use MFX B =01
when you want to use MFX C =02
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
fig.8-09_99
4 . Select the MFX type.
Multitimbre MFX MFX
Common MFX Type Number
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 mm 00] [tt] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (mm): when you want to use MFX A =06
when you want to use MFX B =08
when you want to use MFX C =0A
Data (tt):
Select the effect type (00–5A)
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
<Example> Share MFX B with the sounds of parts 4, 6, and 7, and set the effect type to 24:REVERB
1 .
F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 00 31 00 3F F7
2 -1 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 23 1F 00 2E F7
2 -2 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 25 1F 00 2C F7
2 -3 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 26 1F 00 2B F7
3 -1 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 23 20 01 2C F7
3 -2 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 25 20 01 2A F7
3 -3 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 26 20 01 29 F7
4 .
F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 08 00 18 50 F7
6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Ed itin g th e MFX e ffe ct p a ra m e te rs
You can edit effect parameters such as equalizer gain and frequency, delay time, and feedback level.
The MFX effect parameters will sometimes be included in the sound parameters (PART), and sometimes be outside
the sound (COMMON). The address will differ depending on which of these is being referenced, as specified by
“MFX source.”
*
When MFX source = PART
When MFX source = PART (i.e., when editing the MFX of an enhanced sound), transmit the following
system exclusive data.
fig.8-10_99
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [p1 p2 r1 r2] [d1 d2 d3 d4] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (p1 p2): when editing the insertion effect for part 1 =11 00
when the sound is a drum set =11 10
when editing the insertion effect for part 2 =11 20
when the sound is a drum set =11 30
when editing the insertion effect for part 3 =11 40
when the sound is a drum set =11 50
Address (r1 r2): when editing parameter number 1 =06 11
when editing parameter number 2 =06 15
: (the address will increment 04H each time the parameter number increases by 1)
when editing parameter number 29 =07 01
when editing parameter number 30 =07 05
when editing parameter number 31 =07 09
when editing parameter number 32 =07 0D
Data
(d1, d2, d3, d4): Effect parameter
The lower 4 bits of the four data bytes indicate a signed numerical value.
Da ta b y te e x p re ssio n
The value to be specified is first expressed as a 16-bit hexadecimal in which 32768 = 8000H is 0.
Each digit is input in the lower place of each data byte.
Parameter value to be specified
-20000 = 031EH
-19999 = 031FH
:
Data bytes
00 03 01 0E
00 03 01 0F
:
-2 = 7FFFH
-1 = 7FFFH
0 = 8000H
1 = 8001H
07 0F 0F 0E
07 0F 0F 0F
08 00 00 00
08 00 00 01
08 00 00 02
:
2 = 8002H
:
19999 = CE1FH
20000 = CE20H
0C 0E 01 0F
0C 0E 02 00
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
<Example> Editing the MFX of part 3
If MFX type=18:Mod Delay is applied to the sound of part 3 and you want to change its DLY Right
setting (parameter number 02) to 80 (=50H), transmit the following system exclusive data.
1 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 11 40 06 15 08 00 05 00 07 F7
When MFX source = COMMON
When MFX source = COMMON, transmit the following system exclusive data.
F0 41 10 00 48 12 [10 00 r1 r2] [d1 d2 d3 d4] [ss] F7
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Address (p1 p2): when editing MFX A’s parameter number 1 =06 11 (for MFX B =08 11, for MFX C =0A
11)
when editing MFX A’s parameter number 2 =06 15
when editing MFX A’s parameter number 3 =06 19
:
:
: (the address will increment by 04H each time the parameter number increases by 1)
when editing MFX A’s parameter number 29 =07 01 (for MFX B =09 11, for MFX C =0B
11)
when editing MFX A’s parameter number 30 =07 05
when editing MFX A’s parameter number 31 =07 09
when editing MFX A’s parameter number 32 =07 0D
:
:
:
Data
(d1, d2, d3, d4): Effect parameter
The lower 4 bits of the four data bytes indicate a signed numerical value. For details on the data byte
expression, refer to "Data byte expression" (p. 67).
Checksum (ss): For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the
checksum” within “MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-
ROM.
<Example> Editing MFX C COMMON
If MFX C COMMON is set to MFX type=53:Od2, and you want to change its EQ Low Gain (parameter
number 05) to -3 dB, transmit the following system exclusive data.
1 . F0 41 10 00 48 12 10 00 0A 21 07 0F 0F 0D 13 F7
6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
● W ritin g / lo a d in g SD-8 0 se ttin g s
The SD-80 is able to transmit the settings of its sound generator as MIDI data. Two types of data can be
transmitted: Bulk data, which transmits a group of parameters; and Individual data, which transmits a
single parameter. All data is transmitted in the form of system exclusive data.
Bulk Dump is used when you want to save SD-80 settings on your sequencer software or an external
MIDI sequencer. You can also connect two SD-80 units and transmit a bulk dump to set all parameters of
both SD-80 units to the same settings.
By using Individual data you can create song data more efficiently, since you will not have to look up
each system exclusive message.
Tra n sm ittin g a b u lk d u m p
When transmitting or receiving bulk dump data, you must also check settings and procedures on your
sequencer software or external MIDI sequencer. Here we will explain how to transmit a bulk dump from
the SD-80.
*
Bulk Dump can be executed only when the sound generator is in Native mode. In other cases, this will be displayed
as “---” and cannot be executed.
fig.8-3
5
1
3
4
2
1 . Press [SYSTEM].
The button will light.
2 . Press [PAGE ] or [PAGE ] to make the display indicate Bulk Dump.
fig.7-1aa_67.2
Bulk Dump A01–A16, B1–B16, COMMON, ALL
Specifies the internal sound generator Part whose
parameter values will be transmitted when the bulk
dump is executed.
*
A01--A16 and B01--B16 will transmit the part parameters and patch parameters of the selected patch. COMMON
will transmit the parameters that are common to all parts. ALL will transmit all the parameters of A01--B16 and
COMMON.
3 . Use the [VALUE] dial to select the port from which the data will be transmitted.
4 . Begin recording on your sequencer software or external MIDI sequencer.
5 . Press [ENTER].
Transmission of the highlighted data will begin. While the display indicates Transmit SysEx, the SD-80
is transmitting data. Press [EXIT] if you want to abort transmission.
6 . Press [INST] to return to the main screen.
7 . When data transmission is completed, the display will indicate COMPLETED. Stop recording on your
sequencer software or external MIDI sequencer.
By playing back the saved bulk dump data on your sequencer software or external MIDI sequencer, you
can restore the SD-80 to the state in which it was when the data was saved.
6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI
Tra n sm ittin g in d ivid u a l d a ta
Individual data can be transmitted in each editing screen.
fig.8-3a
1 . In each editing screen, select the parameter that you want to transmit, and specify
its value.
2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [ENTER]. The highlighted parameter value will be
transmitted.
2
7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
If the SD-80 does not function as you expect, please check the following points first. If this does not
resolve the problem, please contact a Roland Service Center (refer to the back cover).
● Po w e r w o n ’t co m e o n
● Is the power cord of the SD-80 correctly connected to the AC outlet and to the SD-80?
Make the correct connections. (● “Getting Started”)
● In su fficie n t vo lu m e o n a d e vice co n n e cte d to th e a u d io o u tp u t ja ck s
● Could you be using a connection cable with a built-in resistor?
Use a connection cable without a resistor (such as one from the Roland PCS series).
● A cable with a built-in resistor is sometimes included with audio playback equipment.
Using such a cable may cause the playback to be too soft. Please use a cable that does not have a built-in
resistor.
● Are output jacks selected correctly in the SYSTEM screen?
● A sp e cific p a rt ca n n o t b e h e a rd
● Make sure that the MIDI receive channel of the Part matches the MIDI transmit channel of the connected MIDI
device. (● "Rx Channel (Receive channel) " (p. 37))
● Th e re is a p a rt th a t d o e s n o t so u n d e ve n w h e n y o u p re ss th e [PREVIEW ]
b u tto n .
● Is the part soloed or muted?
(● "Muting a part" (p. 28), "Soloing a part" (p. 29))
● Keyboard Range settings may have been made.
(● "Part parameters (Native mode)" (p. 37))
● Are you transmitting a program change number that the SD-80 does not support?
Refer to "Instrument list (GM2 / Native mode)" (p. 95) for details about the sounds provided on the SD-
80.
● Is the sound generator mode correct?
Specify the sound generator mode that includes the sound you want to select.
(● "Switching the sound generator mode (Inst Initialize)" (p. 50))
● Is the sound set correct?
If the sound generator mode is GM2 mode or Native mode, there are four variations of sound set. Specify
the sound set that includes the sound you want to select (● "Selecting the sound set" (p. 25)).
7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
● N o te s d o n o t so u n d
Compared to other problems, there are a greater number and wider variety of reasons that notes do not
sound. However in many cases, this problem is caused by incorrect connections between devices, or by
incorrect driver or software settings.
● Is the power of the connected device(s) turned on?
● Has the volume level been lowered by the volume knob?
● Have the MIDI IN and OUT connectors been connected incorrectly?
● Can you hear sound through a connected set of headphones?
If you can hear sound in the headphones, check whether the audio cable conveying the signal to the other
device is broken or has a faulty connection, or whether there is a problem with the connected audio
device.
● Does the PART level meter move in the display?
If the PART level meter is moving, the SD-80 is receiving MIDI data correctly. Check the setting of the
volume knobs and the cable connections once again.
● Is the part muted?
If the display indicates ●, that part has been muted. Turn muting off ("Muting a part" (p. 28)).
● The volume level of all parts may have been lowered. (p. 10)
● The volume level may have been lowered by an expression pedal (or similar device) connected to a connected MIDI
device.
If there is still no sound, it is possible that there is a problem with the driver or software settings. Refer to
“Troubleshooting” in the Getting Started manual, and check the appropriate points.
● Th e PART le ve l m e te r d o e s n o t m o ve e ve n w h e n n o te s so u n d
● Is PART A shown in the display while you are sending MIDI messages to Part B?
If so, press [PART ] or [PART ] to view PART B in the display.
● So u n d is d isto rte d
● Is an effect that distorts the sound being applied?
If a specific sound or part is distorted, lower the Part Level.
● Pitch is in co rre ct
● Has Coarse Tuning been applied to all parts or to a specific part?
("Coarse Tune (Channel Coarse Tuning) " (p. 36))
● Did you make Fine Tune settings for a specific part?
("Fine Tune (Channel Fine Tuning)" (p. 36))
● Has Scale Tuning been applied?
("Scale/Octave Tuning Adjust" (p. 36))
● N o te s a re “ stu ck ” (co n tin u e so u n d in g )
● Depending on the sequencer software you are using, changing the recording track while playing the keyboard may
cause notes to stick.
7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
● So m e th in g is w ro n g w ith th e so u n d
● You may have switched to another sound after editing sound parameters (such as the filter).
Set all sound parameter values to 0. ("Editing the parameters" (p. 31))
● It is possible that the parameter settings of the SD-80 have become corrupted.
Please initialize the sound generator. ("Switching the sound generator mode (Inst Initialize)" (p. 50))
*
The system parameter settings will be preserved even if the sound generator is initialized.
● Are you using MFX?
If a sound that uses MFX (a sound from the enhanced set) is being played, and you switch the MFX type,
or you choose a different enhanced sound, one that uses a different effect type, the sound will continue
playing with the newly selected effect settings. Please wait until the enhanced sound has finished playing
before you change the MFX settings or select a different enhanced sound.
● N o te s a re in te rru p te d
● If you attempt to use more than 128 voices simultaneously, notes will be interrupted.
("Polyphony and voices" (p. 18))
● Does the device ID number of the transmitted exclusive data match the device ID number of the SD-80?
("Setting the Device ID Number" (p. 51))
● Is the checksum correct?
For details on the calculation method, refer to the section “How to calculate the checksum” within
“MIDI Implementation” (MIDIImp_E.pdf) on the included CD-ROM.
● W h e n co n n e cte d to y o u r co m p u te r via USB, so u n d g e n e ra to r p a ra m e te rs
a re n o t o u tp u t fro m th e MIDI co n n e cto rs
● If you are using USB mode, the MIDI connectors of the SD-80 will function as a MIDI interface for externally
connected MIDI devices. The data from the computer will be output from the USB connector, and not from the
MIDI connectors. This means that sound generator bulk data or individual data cannot be transmitted from the
MIDI connectors.
If you are not using a USB connection, the MIDI connectors are used to exchange MIDI messages directly with the
SD-80. A data request received from the MIDI IN connector will be transmitted to the MIDI OUT connector.
● W h e n co n n e cte d to y o u r co m p u te r via USB, d a ta is n o t o u tp u t to MIDI
O UT 2
● If you set the MIDI OUT/ THRU switch to the [IN1 THRU] position while the SD-80 is operating in USB mode, the
MIDI messages input to the MIDI IN 1 connector will be retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT 2
connector.
At this time, the MIDI OUT 2 connector cannot be used for output, even though it is recognized by the computer.
● Se q u e n ce r so ftw a re d o e s n o t p la y th e MIDI so u n d g e n e ra to r co n n e cte d
to th e SD-8 0
● Of the music data received at the SD-80’s USB connector, the data assigned to the outputs “SD-80 MIDI OUT 1” and
“SD-80 MIDI OUT 2” will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT 1 connector and MIDI OUT 2 connector, respectively.
Make the correct settings in your sequencer software and in the various drivers.
7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
● W h e n y o u tu rn MFX o n , a ll o f th e sy ste m e ffe cts y o u h a ve p re vio u sly se t
(su ch a s re ve rb ) a re in itia lize d .
● When you turn MFX on, it will no longer be possible to use control changes to set the send level of the system effect.
This means that when you turn MFX on, it will be necessary to send the signal to the system effect via a
different route than before.
You can use the MFX SEND LEVEL TO REVERB/ CHORUS/ DELAY system exclusive message to set the
system effect send level (common to the signals that have passed through the insertion effect) for when
MFX is turned ON ("Controlling the SD-80 via MIDI" (p. 53)).
● Yo u w a n t to in itia lize th e so u n d g e n e ra to r m o d e e a ch tim e th e p o w e r is
tu rn e d o n
● When the SD-80 is turned on, it is initialized to the sound generator mode specified in "Specifying the start-up
sound generator mode" (p. 51)
● If an exclusive message initializing the sound generator is inserted (e.g., on your sequencer) at the beginning of a
song, the sound generator will be initialized before the song begins.
● I w a n t to tra n sm it th e d a ta fo r o n ly a sp e cific p a ra m e te r to th e co m p u te r
(se q u e n ce r so ftw a re )
● The SD-80 is able to transmit the following two types of data.
• "Transmitting a bulk dump" (p. 69)
• "Transmitting individual data" (p. 70)
Bulk Dump allows you to send multiple parameters in one transmission.
Individual data lets you create data without having to look up each system exclusive message, and
provides an efficient way to create (for example) song data that contains exclusive messages.
If a bulk dump would involve too much data, you can try using this “individual data.”
● In so m e ca se s, d e p e n d in g o n th e e n viro n m e n t in w h ich th e u n it is
in sta lle d , th e su rfa ce o f th e p a n e l m a y so m e tim e s fe e l ro u g h a n d g ra in y .
This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge, which is absolutely harmless. However, if you are
concerned about this, connect the ground terminal (p. 12) with an external ground. When the unit is
grounded, a slight hum may occur, depending on the particulars of your installation. If you are unsure of
the connection method, contact the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the "Information" page.
Unsuitable places for connection
•
•
•
Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be dangerous in the event of lightning)
7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ap p e n d ice s
Pa rt p a ra m e te r list
● Pa rt p a ra m e te rs (GM2 m o d e , N a tive m o d e )
Parameter
Value
Inst Type
Inst Type
INST, DRUM
0–100–127
L64–0–63R
0–127
Volume
Volume
Panpot
Pan
Chorus Send
Reverb Send
Vibrato Rate
Chorus Send Level
Reverb Send Level
Vibrato Rate
0–40–127
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
-64–0–+63
ON, OFF
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
TVF Cutoff Freq
TVF Resonance
TVF&TVA Release
TVF&TVA Attack
TVF&TVA Decay
Portament SW
Portament Time
Coarse Tuning
Fine Tuning
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
TVF Cutoff Frequency
TVF Resonance
TVF&TVA Release
TVF&TVA Attack
TVF&TVA Decay
Portament SW
Portament Time
Channel Coarse Tuning
Channel Fine Tuning
Mono/Poly mode
Rx Channel
0–127
-24–0–+24
-100.0–0.0–+100.0 cent
Poly, Mono
1–16, OFF
0– +/-24
Mono/Poly
Rx Channel
PitchBendSens
Modulation Depth
Scale/Octave Tuning Adjust
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
Modulation Depth
Scale/Octave Tuning Adjust
0–127
-64–0–+63
● Pa rt p a ra m e te rs (N a tive m o d e )
Parameter
Value
Legato ON/OFF
Legato ON/OFF
ON, OFF
Part Velocity Sens Offset
Part Keyboard Fade Width Lower
Part Keyboard Range Lower
Part Keyboard Range Upper
Part Keyboard Fade Width Upper
PART OUTPUT ASSIGN
PART OUTPUT MFX SELECT
PART DRY SEND LEVEL
Part Velocity Sens Offset
Part Keyboard Fade Width Lower
Part Keyboard Range Lower
Part Keyboard Range Upper
Part Keyboard Fade Width Upper
Part Output Assign
-63–0–+63
0–127
C-1–UPPER
LOWER–G9
0–127
MFX, A, PAT
MFX A, MFX B, MFX C
Part Output MFX Select
Part Dry Send Level
● Pa ra m e te rs co m m o n to a ll p a rts (GM2 m o d e , N a tive m o d e )
Parameter
Value
Master Volume
Master Volume
0–127
Master Fine Tuning
Master Coarse Tuning
Master Fine Tuning
Master Coarse Tuning
415.3–440.0–466.2Hz
-24–0–+24
7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● Pa ra m e te rs co m m o n to a ll p a rts (N a tive m o d e )
Parameter
Value
SYSTEM Control 1–4
MFX Sw
System Control
MFX Switch
OFF, CC01–31, 33–95, BEND, AFT
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Chorus Sw
Chorus Switch
Reverb Switch
Scale Tune Switch
Reverb Sw
Scale Tune Sw
7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Effe ct p a ra m e te r list
● Effe ct p a ra m e te r (GM2 m o d e )
Re ve rb (Sy ste m Effe ct)
Parameter
Value
Reverb Type
Reverb Type
Reverb Time
Small Room, Medium Room, Large Room,
Medium Hall, Large Hall, Plate
Reverb Time
0–127
Ch o ru s (Sy ste m Effe ct)
Parameter
Value
Chorus Type
Chorus Type
Chorus1, Chorus2, Chorus3, Chorus4, FB
Chorus, Flanger
Mod Rate
Modulation Rate
Modulation Depth
Feedback
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
Mod Depth
Feedback
Send to Reverb
Send to Reverb
EQ (Eq u a lize r)
Parameter
Value
EQ Switch
EQ Switch
Off, On
EQL Low Frequency
EQR Low Frequency
EQL Low Gain
EQL Low Frequency
EQR Low Frequency
EQL Low Gain
200, 400Hz
200, 400Hz
-15–+15
EQR Low Gain
EQR Low Gain
-15–+15
EQL High Frequency
EQR High Frequency
EQL High Gain
EQL High Frequency
EQR High Frequency
EQL High Gain
2000, 4000, 8000Hz
2000, 4000, 8000Hz
-15–+15
EQR High Gain
EQR High Gain
-15–+15
7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● Effe ct p a ra m e te r (N a tive m o d e )
Re ve rb (Sy ste m Effe ct)
Parameter
Value
Reverb Type
Reverb Type
Reverb Level
0(Off), 1(Reverb), 2(Room), 3(SRV Hall),
4(SRV Plate)(*1)
Reverb Level
0–127
(*1) When Reverb Type is set to 1 (Reverb)
Parameter
Value
Type
Reverb/Delay Type
*2
Time
Reverb/Delay Time
Reverb/Delay HF Damp
Delay Feedback
0–127
*3
HF Damp
Feedback
0–127
*2: ROOM1, ROOM2, STAGE1, STAGE2, HALL1, HALL2, DELAY, PAN-DELAY
*3: 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
(*1)When Reverb Type is 2 (Room), 3 (SRV Hall), or 4 (SRV Plate)
Parameter
Value
Pre Delay
Time
Pre Delay Time
Reverb Time
0.0–100 ms
0–127
1–8
Size
Size
High Cut
High Cut Frequency
Reverb Density
Reverb Diffusion
LF Damp Frequency
LF Damp Gain
HF Damp Frequency
HF Damp Gain
*4
Density
0–127
0–127
*5
Diffusion
LF Damp Freq
LF Damp Gain
HF Damp Freq
HF Damp Gain
-36–0 dB
*6
-36–0 dB
*4: 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12500 Hz, BYPASS
*5: 50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000 Hz
*6: 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12500 Hz
Ch o ru s (Sy ste m Effe ct)
Parameter
Value
Chorus Type
Chorus Type
0(Off), 1(Chorus), 2(Delay)(*7)
MAIN, REV, MAIN+REV
0–127
Chorus Output Select
Chorus Level
Chorus Output Select
Chorus Level
Chorus Parameter 1-12
Chorus Parameter 1-12
(*7)When Chorus Type is 1 (CHORUS)
Parameter
Value
Rate
Chorus Rate
Chorus Depth
Chorus Feedback
Phase
0.05–10.00 Hz
0–127
Depth
Feedback
Phase
0–127
0–180 degrees
0.0–100 ms
OFF, LPF, HPF
*8
Pre Delay
Type
Chorus Pre Delay
Filter Type
Cutoff freq
Cutoff Frequency
*8: 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
(*7)When the Chorus Type is 2 (DELAY)
Parameter
Value
Center
Left
Delay Center
200–1000 ms, note value
Delay Left
200–1000 ms, note value
Right
Delay Right
200–1000 ms, note value
HF Damp
Feedback
Center
Left
HF Damp
*9
Feedback
-98–+98%
0–127
0–127
0–127
Delay Center Level
Delay Left Level
Delay Right Level
Right
*9: 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
MFX (Mu lti-e ffe cts)
Parameter
Value
MFX A-C Type
Multi-effect A–C Type
0–90
MFX A-C Dry Send Level
MFX A-C Chorus Send Level
MFX A-C Reverb Send Level
MFX A-C Control 1-4 Source
Multi-effect A–C Dry Send Level
Multi-effect A–C Chorus Send Level
Multi-effect A–C Reverb Send Level
MFX A–C Control 1–4 Source
0–127
0–127
0–127
OFF, CC01–95, PITCH BEND, AFTERTOUCH,
SYS-CTRL 1–4
MFX A-C Control 1-4 Sens
MFX A-C Parameter 1-32
MFX A SOURCE
MFX A–C Control 1–4 Sensitivity
MFX A–C Parameter
MFX A source
-63–+63
COMMON, PART1–32
COMMON, PART1–32
COMMON, PART1–32
MFX, DRY, PAT
MFX B SOURCE
MFX B source
MFX C SOURCE
MFX C source
PART OUTPUT ASSIGN
PART OUTPUT MFX SELECT
PART DRY SEND LEVEL
Part Output Assign
Part Output MFX Select
Part Dry Send Level
MFX A, MFX B, MFX C
0–127
EQ (Eq u a lize r)
Parameter
Value
EQ Switch
EQ Switch
Off, On
EQL Low Frequency
EQR Low Frequency
EQL Low Gain
EQL Low Frequency
EQR Low Frequency
EQL Low Gain
200, 400Hz
200, 400Hz
-15–+15
EQR Low Gain
EQR Low Gain
-15–+15
EQL High Frequency
EQR High Frequency
EQL High Gain
EQL High Frequency
EQR High Frequency
EQL High Gain
2000, 4000, 8000Hz
2000, 4000, 8000Hz
-15–+15
EQR High Gain
EQR High Gain
-15–+15
7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
MFX p a ra m e te r list
1 :Ste re o EQ
4
5
1250Hz Gain
2000Hz Gain
3150Hz Gain
4000Hz Gain
8000Hz Gain
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 4
15
15
15
15
15
0
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
6
1
5
Low Freq
Mid1 Freq
Mid2 Freq
High Freq
Low Gain
Mid1 Gain
Mid2 Gain
High Gain
Middle1 Q
Middle2 Q
Output Level
200, 400 Hz
0 - 1
0
7
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
4000, 8000 Hz
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 16
0 - 16
0 - 2
7
8
8
16
1
9
Band Width Q 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
3
11
10
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
64
2
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 4
22
17
16
19
0
L64 - 63R
7
-15 - +15 dB
10
4
-15 - +15 dB
6 :En h a n ce r
-15 - +15 dB
6
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
0 - 127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
9
0 - 4
0
1
2
3
4
5
EH Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
127
64
11
0 - 127
127
EH Mix
0 - 127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
15
0 - 30
15
0 - 127
127
2 :O ve rd rive
7 :Au to W a h
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
3
OD Drive
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
AS AmpType
SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
AW Filter Type LPF, BPF
0 - 1
0
0 - 3
0
AW Sens
AW Manual
AW Peak
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 127
0
4
5
6
2
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
0 - 127
15
15
127
64
64
100
19
64
127
AW LFO Rate 0.05 - 10.00 Hz
AW LFO Depth 0 - 127
L64 - 63R
Output Level
0 - 127
3 :Disto rtio n
8 :Ro ta ry
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
3
DS Drive
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
AS AmpType
SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
5
2
4
7
9
Rotary Speed
WF SlowRate
WF FastRate
SLOW, FAST
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 1
0
0 - 3
3
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 15
39
4
5
6
2
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
0 - 127
15
15
127
64
121
10
WF Acceleration 0 - 15
WF Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 15
127
127
39
L64 - 63R
10 Separation
0 - 127
1
3
6
8
TW SlowRate
TW FastRate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
121
10
4 :Ph a se r
TW Acceleration 0 - 15
TW Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
11 Output Level
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
PH Manual
PH Rate
100 - 8000 Hz
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
30
19
64
0
PH Depth
9 :Co m p re sso r
PH Resonance 0 - 127
PH Mix Level
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 127
127
127
64
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 127
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
CP Attack
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 3
64
64
127
0
L64 - 63R
CP Sustain
CP Post Gain
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 127
0, +6, +12, +18 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
5 :Sp e ctru m
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
15
15
127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
L64 - 63R
1
2
3
250Hz Gain
500Hz Gain
1000Hz Gain
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
15
15
15
8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
11
Output Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
1 0 :Lim ite r
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
4
LM Thresh
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 3
64
32
2
LM Release
LM Ratio
0 - 127
1 5 :Ste re o Fla n g e r
1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1, 100:1
0, +6, +12, +18 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
LM Post Gain
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 3
1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
0 - 127
15
15
127
64
4
5
FL LFO Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 90
0 - 125
0 - 2
9
FL LFO Depth 0 - 127
50
89
90
10
2
7
FL Feedback
FL Phase
-98 - +98%
L64 - 63R
6
0 - 180 degree
0.0 - 100.0 ms
OFF, LPF, HPF
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
-15 - +15 dB
3
FL PreDelay
Filter Type
1
1 1 :He x a -Ch o ru s
2
Filter Cutoff
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 16
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
7
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
8
15
15
50
127
2
3
5
1
4
6
7
8
CH Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 40
9
9
-15 - +15 dB
CH Depth
20
0
10
11
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
CH Depth Dev -20 - +20
Output Level
CH Pre Delay
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0 - 125
0 - 20
5
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
CH Pre Delay Dev 0 - 127
0
CH Pan Dev
Balance
0 - 127
0 - 20
20
50
127
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
1 6 :Ste p Fla n g e r
Output Level
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
2
3
FL LFO Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
9
1 2 :Tre m o lo Ch o ru s
FL LFO Depth 0 - 127
50
89
90
5
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
4
FL Feedback
FL Phase
-98 - +98%
2
3
1
4
6
5
7
8
CH Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 90
9
6
0 - 180 degree
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0 - 90
CH Depth
CH PreDelay
TRE Rate
TRE Phase
50
0
1
FL PreDelay
Step Rate
0 - 125
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 180 degree
5
0.10 - 20.00 Hz, note*1 0 - 125
49
15
15
50
127
39
90
127
50
127
7
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 30
8
0 - 30
TRE Separation 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
9
0 - 100
0 - 127
Balance
D100:0W - D0:100W
10
Output Level
Output Level
0 - 127
1 7 :Ste re o De la y
1 3 :Sp a ce -D
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
2
3
7
DLY Left
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0 - 126
0 - 126
126
126
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
CH Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 90
9
DLY Right
CH Depth
20
90
10
15
15
50
127
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
0 - 98
0 - 1
17
59
0
CH Phase
CH PreDelay
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 180 degree
0.0 - 100.0 ms
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
6
1
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
0 - 125
0 - 30
DLY Fbk Mode NORMAL, CROSS
4
Phase Left
NORMAL, INVERT
NORMAL, INVERT
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 1
0
0 - 30
5
Phase Right
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 1
0
0 - 100
0 - 127
8
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
15
15
50
127
Output Level
9
-15 - +15 dB
10
11
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
1 4 :Ste re o Ch o ru s
Output Level
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
4
5
CH Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 90
0 - 125
0 - 2
9
CH Depth
20
90
10
2
6
CH Phase
CH PreDelay
Filter Type
Filter Cutoff
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 180 degree
0.0 - 100.0 ms
OFF, LPF, HPF
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
-15 - +15 dB
3
1
2
0 - 16
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
7
8
15
15
50
9
-15 - +15 dB
10
D100:0W - D0:100W
8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
7
8
9
5
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 30
15
1 8 :Mo d u la tio n De la y
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 127
50
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
Output Level
Output Pan
127
64
2
3
5
DLY Left
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0 - 126
0 - 126
126
126
L64 - 63R
DLY Right
(*1):200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
0 - 98
0 - 1
17
59
0
4
1
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
DLY Fbk Mode NORMAL, CROSS
2 2 :2 Vo ice Pitch Sh ifte r
6
MOD Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 90
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
19
20
90
15
15
50
127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
7
MOD Depth
MOD Phase
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
2
4
Coarse A
Fine A
-24 - +12 semitone
-100 - +100 cent
L64 - 63R
0 - 36
24
50
64
0
8
0 - 180 degree
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 126
0 - 4
9
8
Pan A
10
11
12
6
PreDelay A
0.0 - 500.0 ms
1
PitchShifterMode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
0
Output Level
3
Coarse B
Fine B
-24 - +12 semitone
0 - 36
24
50
64
0
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
5
-100 - +100 cent
L64 - 63R
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 126
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 127
9
Pan B
7
Pre Delay B
Lev Balance
Balance
0.0 - 500.0 ms
A100:0B - A0:100B
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
10
11
12
50
50
127
1 9 :Trip le Ta p De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
Output Level
3
1
2
5
DLY Center
DLY Left
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 125
115
10
DLY Right
60
2 3 :Fb k Pitch Sh ifte r
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 17
17
2
3
CoarsePitch
FinePitch
PreDelay
-24 - +12 semitone
-100 - +100 cent
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0 - 36
0 - 100
0 - 126
0 - 4
24
50
0
4
8
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
DLY CenterLevel 0 - 127
DLY LeftLevel 0 - 127
DLY RightLevel 0 - 127
0 - 98
59
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
127
127
127
15
4
6
1
PitchShifterMode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
0
7
5
Feedback
-98 - +98%
0 - 98
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 127
59
15
15
50
127
64
9
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
7
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
10
11
12
0 - 30
15
8
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
9
Output Level
127
10
6
Output Level
Output Pan
L64 - 63R
2 0 :Q u a d ru p le Ta p De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
2 4 :Re ve rb
1
2
DLY Time 1
DLY Time 2
DLY Time 3
DLY Time 4
DLY Level 1
DLY Level 2
DLY Level 3
DLY Level 4
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
200 - 1000 ms, note*1
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
115
90
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
RV Type
ROOM1, ROOM2,
STAGE1, STAGE2,
HALL1, HALL2
3
60
4
10
0 - 5
0
5
127
127
127
127
2
3
4
RV PreDelay
RV Time
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 127
10
10
6
0 - 127
7
0 - 127
RV HF Damp
200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
8
0 - 127
0 - 17
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
17
15
15
50
127
10
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
5
6
7
8
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 17
17
9
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
0 - 98
59
11
12
Balance
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
Output Level
Output Level
127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
2 1 :Tim e Co n tro l De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
3
4
DLY Time
200 - 1000 ms
0 - 120
0 - 15
10
10
DLY Acceleration 0 - 15
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
0 - 98
0 - 30
17
59
15
2
6
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
EQ Low Gain
-15 - +15 dB
8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
2 5 :Ga te d Re ve rb
3 0 :Disto rtio n ● Fla n g e r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
RV Type
NORMAL, REVERSE,
SWEEP1, SWEEP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DS Drive
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
127
64
10
9
0 - 3
0
DS Pan
L64 - 63R
2
3
4
5
6
7
RV PreDelay
RV GateTime
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0.0 - 100.0 ms
5 - 500 ms
0 - 125
0 - 99
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
10
10
15
15
50
127
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
FL Depth
40
89
50
127
FL Feedback
FL Balance
Output Level
-98 - +98%
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
Output Level
2 6 :O ve rd rive ● Ch o ru s
3 1 :Disto rtio n ● De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
OD Drive
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
64
64
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
DS Drive
DS Pan
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 126
0 - 98
127
64
OD Pan
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
0.0 - 500.0 ms
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
DLY Time
10
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
59
CH Depth
CH Balance
Output Level
20
50
127
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 17
17
6
7
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
127
(*1):200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
2 7 :O ve rd rive ● Fla n g e r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OD Drive
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
64
64
10
9
3 2 :En h a n ce r ● Ch o ru s
OD Pan
L64 - 63R
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
EH Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
127
64
10
9
FL Depth
40
89
50
127
EH Mix Level
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0 - 127
FL Feedback
FL Balance
Output Level
-98 - +98%
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
CH Depth
20
50
127
CH Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
2 8 :O ve rd rive ● De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
3 3 :En h a n ce r ● Fla n g e r
1
2
3
4
5
OD Drive
OD Pan
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 126
0 - 98
64
64
10
59
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
L64 - 63R
0.0 - 500.0 ms
DLY Time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EH Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
127
64
10
9
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
EH Mix Level
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
0 - 127
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 17
17
6
7
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
FL Depth
40
89
50
127
127
FL Feedback
FL Balance
Output Level
-98 - +98%
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
2 9 :Disto rtio n ● Ch o ru s
3 4 :En h a n ce r ● De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
DS Drive
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
127
64
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
EH Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 126
127
127
64
DS Pan
L64 - 63R
EH Mix Level
DLY Time
0 - 127
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0.0 - 100.0 ms
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
10
CH Depth
CH Balance
Output Level
20
50
127
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 17
0 - 100
59
17
50
6
7
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
10
Output Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
3 5 :Ch o ru s ● De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
3 9 :Fla n g e r/ De la y
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 126
0 - 98
10
9
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
CH Depth
CH Balance
DLY Time
20
50
10
59
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
10
9
D100:0W - D0:100W
0.0 - 500.0 ms
FL Depth
40
89
50
10
59
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
FL Feedback
FL Balance
DLY Time
-98 - +98%
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
D100:0W - D0:100W
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0 - 100
0 - 126
0 - 98
0 - 17
17
9
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
10
127
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
17
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
9
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
10
127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
3 6 :Fla n g e r ● De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
10
9
4 0 :Ch o ru s/ Fla n g e r
FL Depth
40
89
50
10
59
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
FL Feedback
FL Balance
DLY Time
-98 - +98%
1
2
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
10
9
D100:0W - D0:100W
0.0 - 500.0 ms
0 - 100
0 - 126
0 - 98
3
CH Depth
20
50
10
9
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
4
CH Balance
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
D100:0W - D0:100W
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
5
0 - 17
17
6
9
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
7
FL Depth
40
89
50
127
10
127
8
FL Feedback
FL Balance
Output Level
-98 - +98%
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
9
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
10
3 7 :Ch o ru s ● Fla n g e r
4 1 :Ste re o Ph a se r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 98
10
9
1
2
PH Type
1, 2
0 - 1
0
PH Mode
PH Polarity
PH Manual
PH Rate
4-STAGE, 8-STAGE
INVERSE, SYNCHRO
0 - 127
0 - 1
1
3
CH Depth
20
50
10
9
3
0 - 1
1
4
CH Balance
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
D100:0W - D0:100W
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
6
0 - 127
64
10
64
64
69
127
0
5
4
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
6
5
PH Depth
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 127
0 - 1
7
FL Depth
40
89
50
127
7
PH Resonance 0 - 127
8
FL Feedback
FL Balance
Output Level
-98 - +98%
8
PH X-Feedback -98 - +98%
9
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
11
9
PH Mix Level
0 - 127
10
StepRate Switch OFF, ON
10
12
13
14
Step Rate
0.1 - 20.0 Hz, note*2
1 - 222
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
50
15
15
127
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
3 8 :Ch o ru s/ De la y
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
CH PreDelay
CH Rate
0.0 - 100.0 ms
0.05 - 10.00 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 125
0 - 125
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 126
0 - 98
10
9
CH Depth
CH Balance
DLY Time
20
50
10
59
D100:0W - D0:100W
0.0 - 500.0 ms
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
17
50
9
DLY Balance
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 100
8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
17
14
DLY HFDamp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
4 2 Ke y sy n c Fla n g e r
0 - 17
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
9
10
11
12
5
DLY Level1
DLY Level2
DLY Level3
DLY Level4
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
127
127
127
127
0
3
4
FL PreDelay
FL Rate
0.0 - 100 ms
0 - 125
5
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
10
50
89
90
0
5
FL Depth
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 90
0 - 2
DLY Output Pan1 L64 - 63R
DLY Output Pan2 L64 - 63R
DLY Output Pan3 L64 - 63R
DLY Output Pan4 L64 - 63R
6
FL Feedback
FL Phase
-98 - +98%
6
32
9
0 - 180 degree
OFF, LPF, HPF
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
7
96
1
Filter Type
Filter Cutoff
8
127
15
2
0 - 16
0 - 1
7
15
16
17
18
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
7
StepRate Switch OFF, ON
0
0 - 30
15
8
Step Rate
0.1 - 20.0 Hz, note*2
1 - 222
0 - 1
200
1
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Keysync Switch OFF, ON
Keysync Thres 0 - 127
Keysync Phase 0 - 360 degree
Output Level
127
0 - 127
0 - 180
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
60
0
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
15
15
50
127
4 6 :Re ve rse De la y
Output Level
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DLY Time1
DLY Time2
DLY Time3
DLY Time4
0 - 900 ms, note*2
0 - 900 ms, note*2
0 - 900 ms, note*2
0 - 900 ms, note*2
0 - 922
0 - 922
0 - 922
0 - 922
0 - 98
913
910
913
913
49
4 3 :Fo rm a n t Filte r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
DLY Feedback1 -98 - +98%
DLY Feedback4 -98 - +98%
0 - 98
54
1
2
OD Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 127
0 - 1
1
DLY HF Damp1 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
OD Drive
0 - 127
0 - 4
127
0
0 - 17
17
3
Filter Vowel 1
Filter Vowel 2
Filter Rate
a, e, i, o, u
a, e, i, o, u
9
DLY HF Damp4 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)0 - 17
4
0 - 4
1
17
5
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
20
127
50
1
13
14
15
10
11
12
1
DLY Level1
DLY Level2
DLY Level3
DLY Pan 1
DLY Pan 2
DLY Pan 3
Threshold
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
127
64
64
64
0
6
Filter Depth
Filter Manual
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 1
0 - 127
9
0 - 127
7
Keysync Switch OFF, ON
Keysync Thres 0 - 127
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
0 - 127
8
0 - 127
0 - 30
60
15
15
127
64
10
11
13
12
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
-15 - +15 dB
127
30
15
15
50
127
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 127
0 - 127
17
18
16
19
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
L64 - 63R
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
Output Level
4 4 :Rin g Mo d u la to r
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
RM Freq
0 - 127
0 - 127
60
RM MOD Source OFF, SOURCE,
A, B, C, D
0 - 5
1
4 7 :Sh u ffle De la y
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RM MOD Monitor OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
RM Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
1
2
7
6
8
DLY Time
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1822
0 - 100
0 - 15
1813
67
RM Polarity
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
UP, DOWN
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0
DLY ShuffleRate 0 - 100%
DLY Acceleration 0 - 15
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
15
15
50
127
10
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
0 - 98
59
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
Output Level
0 - 17
17
0
3
4
Pan A
L64 - 63R
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 30
Pan B
L64 - 63R
127
50
15
15
50
127
4 5 :Mu lti Ta p De la y
5
Balance
A100:0B - A0:100B
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0E - D0:100W
0 - 127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
9
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Lev Balance
Output Level
1
2
DLY Time1
DLY Time2
DLY Time3
DLY Time4
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1822
0 - 1822
0 - 1822
0 - 1822
0 - 98
1816
1815
1813
1810
59
10
11
12
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
3
4
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
13
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
4 8 :3 D De la y
5 1 :Lo Fi N o ise
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
3
1
2
8
DLY Time C
DLY Time L
DLY Time R
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1800 ms, note*2
0 - 1822
0 - 1822
0 - 1822
1815
1810
1813
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LoFi Type
1 - 9
0 - 8
2
PostFilter Type OFF, LPF, HPF
PostFilter Cutoff 200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
Radio Noise Detune 0 - 127
0 - 2
1
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 3
13
0
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
0 - 98
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 1
17
59
40
64
64
15
15
40
0
Radio Noise Level 0 - 127
64
0
7
6
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
Disc Noise Type LP, EP, SP, RND
DLY Level C
DLY Level L
DLY Level R
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 127
Disc Noise LPF
200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*2)
4
0 - 127
0 - 17
17
0
5
0 - 127
8
10
11
9
Disc Noise Level 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
10
11
12
9
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0E - D0:100W
SPEAKER, PHONES
0 - 127
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
15
15
100
127
64
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0E - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 127
Output Mode
Output Level
13
12
Output Level
Output Pan
13
0 - 127
127
L64 - 63R
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
4 9 :3 Vo ice Pitch Sh ifte r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
5 2 :Sp e a k e r Sim u la to r
2
3
Coars Pitch1
Coars Pitch2
Coars Pitch3
Fine Pitch1
Fine Pitch2
Fine Pitch3
PS Mode
-24 - +12 semitone
-24 - +12 semitone
-24 - +12 semitone
-100 - +100 cent
-100 - +100 cent
-100 - +100 cent
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
0 - 36
12
0
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 36
4
0 - 36
0
1
2
3
4
5
SP Type
(*1)
0 - 15
0 - 2
6
5
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 4
50
50
50
0
Mic Setting
Mic Level
1, 2, 3
0 - 127
1
6
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
0
7
Mic DirectLevel 0 - 127
Output Level 0 - 127
1
127
11
12
13
8
PS Feedback1 -98 - +98%
PS Feedback2 -98 - +98%
PS Feedback3 -98 - +98%
PS PreDelay1 0.0 - 500 ms
PS PreDelay2 0.0 - 500 ms
PS PreDelay3 0.0 - 500 ms
0 - 98
49
49
49
0
(*1) Small 1, Small 2, Middle, JC-120, Built In 1, Built In 2, Built In 3,
Built In 4, Built In 5, BG Stack 1, BG Stack 2, MS Stack 1, MS
Stack 2, Metal Stack, 2 Stack, 3 Stack
0 - 98
0 - 98
0 - 126
0 - 126
0 - 126
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
9
0
5 3 :O ve rd rive 2
10
20
17
18
19
14
15
16
21
0
Balance
Level1
Level2
Level3
Pan1
D100:0E - D0:100W
100
127
127
127
64
0
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 127
1
2
4
5
OD Drive
OD Tone
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
50
1
0 - 127
0 - 127
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
0 - 127
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
Pan2
0 - 3
0
Pan3
127
127
6
7
8
3
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
0 - 127
15
15
127
64
Output Level
L64 - 63R
5 0 :Lo Fi Co m p re ss
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
5 4 :Disto rtio n 2
2
1
LoFi Type
1 - 9
0 - 8
5
PreFilter Type 1 - 6
0 - 5
1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
3
PostFilter1 Type 1 - 6
0 - 5
1
1
2
4
5
DS Drive
DS Tone
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
50
1
4
PostFilter2 Type OFF, BPF, LPF
PostFilter2 CutOff 200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0 - 2
1
5
0 - 16
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
0 - 127
13
15
15
100
127
64
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
7
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0E - D0:100W
0 - 127
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
0 - 3
3
8
6
7
8
3
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
Output Pan
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
0 - 127
15
15
127
64
6
10
9
Output Level
Output Pan
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
24
Output Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
5 5 :Ste re o Co m p re sso r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
5 9 :Iso la to r
2
1
3
4
5
6
COMP Attack
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 3
64
127
0
COMP Sustain 0 - 127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
COMP PostGain 0, +6, +12, +18 dB
3
2
Boost/Cut Low -60 - +4 dB
Boost/Cut Mid -60 - +4 dB
Boost/Cut High 60 - +4 dB
AntiPhaseLow SW OFF, ON
AntiPhaseLow Lev 0 - 127
AntiPhaseMid SW OFF, ON
AntiPhaseMid Lev 0 - 127
LowBoost SW OFF, ON
LowBoost Lev 0 - 127
0 - 64
0 - 64
0 - 64
0 - 1
60
60
60
0
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
15
15
127
1
6
7
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
0
4
5 6 :Ste re o Lim ite r
5
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
0
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
8
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
LM Threshold
LM Ratio
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 3
64
2
9
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
127
1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1, 100:1
0 - 127
10
Output Level
0 - 127
LM Release
LM PostGain
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
0 - 127
0 - 3
32
1
0, +6, +12, +18 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
6 0 :3 D Ch o ru s
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
15
15
127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
4
5
CH LFO Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
10
20
90
10
0
CH LFO Depth 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 90
0 - 125
0 - 2
6
CH Phase
0 - 180 degree
5 7 :Ga te
3
CH PreDelay
Filter Type
0.0 - 100 ms
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
OFF, LPF, HPF
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
-15 - +15 dB
4
6
7
8
1
2
Gate Mode
Gate Attack
Gate Hold
GATE, DUCK
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
0
0
0
0
2
Filter Cutoff
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 16
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 1
7
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
8
15
15
50
0
0 - 127
9
-15 - +15 dB
Gate Release
GateKey Key
0 - 127
10
7
D100:0W - D0:100W
SPEAKER, PHONES
0 - 127
SOURCE, A
Output Mode
Output Level
GateKey Threshold
0 - 127
GateKey Monitor OFF, ON
11
0 - 127
127
0 - 127
0 - 1
70
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
3
5
9
1
Balance
D100:0E - D0:100W
0 - 100
0 - 127
100
127
Output Level
0 - 127
6 1 :3 D Fla n g e r
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
5 8 :Slice r
4
5
FL LFO Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*1 1 - 222
10
50
89
90
5
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
FL LFO Depth 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 90
0 - 125
0 - 2
1
2
Beat11
Beat12
Beat13
Beat14
Beat21
Beat22
Beat23
Beat24
Beat31
Beat32
Beat33
Beat34
Beat41
Beat42
Beat43
Beat44
Rate
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
0
6
FL Feedback
FL Phase
-98 - +98%
9
0 - 180 degree
0.0 - 100 ms
3
0
3
FL PreDelay
Filter Type
Filter Cutoff
4
0
1
OFF, LPF, HPF
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0
5
0
2
0 - 16
0 - 1
7
6
0
7
StepRate Switch OFF, ON
0
7
127
0
8
Step Rate
0.1 - 20.0 Hz, note*2
1 - 222
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 1
200
15
15
50
0
8
11
12
13
10
14
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
9
0
-15 - +15 dB
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0
D100:0W - D0:100W
SPEAKER, PHONES
0 - 127
127
0
Output Mode
Output Level
0 - 127
127
0
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
127
0
0
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
40
50
1
6 2 :Tre m o lo
Attack
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
ResetTrigger
SOURCE, A
1
TRE Mod Wave TRI, SQR, SIN, SAW1,
SAW2
Reset Threshold 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
60
1
0 - 4
0
Reset Monitor Off, On
2
3
4
TRE Rate
0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
0 - 127
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 30
80
96
15
BeatChange Mode LEGATO, SLASH
BeatChange Shuffle 0 - 127
0 - 1
0
TRE Depth
EQ Low Gain
0 - 127
0
-15 - +15 dB
8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
5
6
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
15
9
Keysync Thres 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
60
0 - 127
127
11
12
13
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
15
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
15
0 - 127
127
6 3 :Au to Pa n
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
6 7 :Mu lti Ta p De la y 2
1
AutoPan ModWave
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
TRI, SQR, SIN, SAW1, SAW2
0 - 4
0
1
2
DLY Time1
DLY Time2
DLY Time3
DLY Time4
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 98
3016
3015
3013
3010
59
2
3
4
5
6
AutoPan Rate 0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
AutoPan Depth 0 - 127
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
40
96
15
15
127
3
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
4
13
14
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
17
9
10
11
12
5
DLY Level1
DLY Level2
DLY Level3
DLY Level4
DLY Pan 1
DLY Pan 2
DLY Pan 3
DLY Pan 4
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
127
127
127
127
0
0 - 127
6 4 :Ste re o Ph a se r 2
0 - 127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 127
1
2
PH Type
PH Mode
1, 2
0 - 1
0
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
4 stage, 8 stage,
6
32
12 stage, 16 stage
0 - 3
1
7
96
3
6
PH Polarity
PH Manual
PH Rate
INVERSE, SYNCHRO
0 - 127
0 - 1
1
8
127
15
0 - 127
64
10
64
64
69
127
0
15
16
17
18
4
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
0 - 30
15
5
PH Depth
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 127
0 - 1
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
7
PH Resonance 0 - 127
Output Level
127
8
PH X-Feedback -98 - +98%
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
11
9
PH Mix Level
0 - 127
StepRate Switch OFF, ON
10
12
13
14
Step Rate
0.1 - 20.0 Hz, note*2
1 - 222
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
50
15
15
127
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
6 8 :Re ve rse De la y 2
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DLY Time1
DLY Time2
DLY Time3
DLY Time4
0 - 1500 ms, note*2
0 - 1500 ms, note*2
0 - 1500 ms, note*2
0 - 1500 ms, note*2
0 - 1522
0 - 1522
0 - 1522
0 - 1522
0 - 98
1516
1513
1516
1516
49
6 5 :Ste re o Au to W a h
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
DLY Feedback1 -98 - +98%
DLY Feedback4 -98 - +98%
1
4
AW FilterType LPF, BPF
0 - 1
1
0 - 98
54
AW Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
60
100
40
20
40
1
DLY HFDamp1 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
5
AW Manual
AW Peak
0 - 17
17
6
9
DLY HFDamp4 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
2
AW LFORate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
0 - 17
17
127
64
64
64
0
3
AW LFODepth 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
13
14
15
10
11
12
1
DLY Level1
DLY Level2
DLY Level3
DLY Pan1
DLY Pan2
DLY Pan3
Threshold
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
7
AW Polarity
AW Phase
UP, DOWN
0 - 127
8
0 - 180 degree
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 90
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
45
15
15
127
0 - 127
9
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
L64 - 63R
0 - 127
10
11
127
30
15
15
50
127
17
18
16
19
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
6 6 :Ste re o Fo rm a n t Filte r
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
Output Level
1
2
OD Switch
OD Drive
OFF, ON
0 - 127
0 - 1
1
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
0 - 127
0 - 4
127
0
3
Filter Vowel1
Filter Vowel2
Filter Rate
a, e, i, o, u
a, e, i, o, u
4
0 - 4
1
5
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
20
127
50
0
6
Filter Depth
Filter Manual
Filter Phase
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 90
0 - 1
10
7
0 - 100
0 - 180 degree
8
Keysync Switch OFF, ON
1
8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
3
4
5
6
7
OD/DS Drive
OD/DS Tone
OD/DS Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
64
50
80
1
6 9 :Sh u ffle De la y 2
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
DLY Time
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 100
0 - 15
3013
67
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
DLY ShuffleRate 0 - 100%
DLY Acceleration 0 - 15
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
0 - 3
0
7
10
8
9
EQ Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
6
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
0 - 98
59
EQ Low Gain
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
OFF, ON
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 16
0 - 4
15
15
15
7
8
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*1)0 - 17
17
12 EQ Mid Gain
3
DLY Pan A
DLY Pan B
DLY Balance
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
L64 - 63R
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 30
0
13
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Freq
EQ Mid Q
4
L64 - 63R
127
50
10
11
14
19
16
18
21
23
24
15
17
20
22
26
25
5
A100:0B - A0:100B
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0
9
15
ROT Switch
ROT Speed
0 - 1
1
10
11
12
0 - 30
15
SLOW, FAST
0 - 1
0
0 - 100
0 - 127
50
ROT WF Slow 0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
ROT WF Fast 0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
40
160
10
127
127
40
160
10
127
127
64
Output Level
127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
ROT WF Accel 0 - 15
ROT WF Level 0 - 127
ROT Separation 0 - 127
0 - 15
0 - 127
0 - 127
7 0 :3 D De la y 2
ROT TW Slow 0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
ROT TW Fast 0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
ROT TW Accel 0 - 15
ROT TW Level 0 - 127
0 - 15
3
1
2
8
DLY Time C
DLY Time L
DLY Time R
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
3015
3010
3013
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 127
L64 - 63R
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz,
BYPASS (*1)
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
0 - 17
0 - 98
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 1
17
59
40
64
64
15
15
40
0
7
6
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
DLY Level C
DLY Level L
DLY Level R
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 127
4
0 - 127
7 3 :Ke y b o a rd Mu lti
5
0 - 127
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
10
11
12
9
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
SPEAKER, PHONES
0 - 127
1
2
RingMod Switch OFF, ON
RingMod Freq 0 - 127
0 - 1
1
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 1
60
50
1
Output Mode
Output Level
3
RingMod Bal
EQ Switch
D100:0W - D0:100W
13
0 - 127
127
4
OFF, ON
5
EQ Low Gain
EQ Mid Gain
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Freq
EQ Mid Q
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
OFF, ON
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 16
0 - 4
15
15
15
7
8
7 1 :Ro ta ry 2
9
6
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
7
0
11
12
13
1
Rotary Speed
Rotary Brake
Spread Value
WF SlowRate
WF FastRate
WF Level
SLOW, FAST
OFF, ON
0 - 127
0 - 1
0 - 1
0 - 10
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
PS Switch
0 - 1
1
0
PS Mode
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
0 - 4
0
10
40
160
127
64
64
40
160
127
64
64
15
15
127
PS CoarsTune -24 - +12 semitone
0 - 36
0 - 100
0 - 126
0 - 98
0 - 100
0 - 1
31
50
0
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
PS FineTune
PS PreDelay
PS Feedback
PS Balance
PH Switch
PH Mode
-100 - +100 cent
0.0 - 500 ms
-98 - +98%
2
5
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
59
50
1
3
WF TransUp
D100:0W - D0:100W
OFF, ON
4
WF TransDown 0 - 127
6
TW SlowRate
TW FastRate
TW Level
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
4 STAGE, 8 STAGE
0 - 127
0 - 1
1
7
PH Manual
PH Rate
0 - 127
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
10
64
64
64
1
10
8
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
0.05 - 10.0, note*2
0 - 127
TW TransUp
PH Depth
9
TW TransDown 0 - 127
PH Resonance 0 - 127
14
15
16
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
PH Mix Level
DLY Switch
0 - 127
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
OFF, ON
0 - 127
DLY TimeLeft
0 - 3000, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 98
3013
3010
59
17
50
127
DLY TimeRight 0 - 3000, note*2
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
7 2 :Ro ta ry Mu lti
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS 0 - 17
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
DLY Balance
Output Level
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0 - 100
0 - 127
1
2
OD/DS Switch OFF, ON
OD/DS Type
0 - 1
1
0
OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION 0 - 1
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
24
23
Output Level
Output Pan
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
64
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS
(*1) MELLOW DRIVE, OVERDRIVE, CRY DRIVE, MELLOW DIST,
LIGHT DIST, FAT DIST, FUZZ DIST
7 4 :Rh o d e s Mu lti
7 6 :Ste re o Lo Fi Co m p re ss
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
EH Switch
EH Sens
OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
64
1
2
1
3
4
5
7
8
6
9
LoFi Type
1 - 9
0 - 8
5
3
EH Mix Level
PH Switch
PH Mode
0 - 127
PreFilter Type 1 - 6
0 - 5
1
4
OFF, ON
PostFilter1 Type 1 - 6
0 - 5
1
5
4 STAGE, 8 STAGE
0 - 127
0 - 1
1
PostFilter2 Type OFF, LPF, HPF
PostFilter2 Cutoff 200 - 8000 Hz
0 - 2
1
6
PH Manual
PH Mix Level
PH Rate
0 - 127
0 - 127
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
64
10
64
64
1
0 - 16
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 127
13
15
15
100
127
10
7
0 - 127
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
0.05 - 10.0, note*2
0 - 127
8
PH Depth
9
PH Resonance 0 - 127
Output Level
11
12
14
15
16
13
19
17
18
20
21
22
CH/FL Switch
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
OFF, ON
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0, note*2
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
CH/FL PreDelay 0.0 - 100
7 7 :Ste re o Lo Fi N o ise
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
CH/FL Bal
D100:0W - D0:100W
1
LoFi Type
1 - 9
0 - 8
0 - 1
2
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Cutoff
OFF, LPF, HPF
12 Hum Noise Type 50, 60 Hz
0
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0 - 16
0 - 1
7
13 Hum Noise LPF 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*1)0 - 17
17
0
TRE/PAN Switch OFF, ON
1
14 Hum Noise Level 0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 2
TRE/PAN Type TREMOLO, AUTO PAN 0 - 1
0
2
3
PostFilter Type OFF, LPF, HPF
PostFilter Cutoff 200 - 8000 Hz (*2)
DiscNoise Type LP, EP, SP, RND
1
TRE/PAN ModWave
TRI, SQR, SIN, SAW1,SAW2
0 - 4
0 - 16
0 - 3
13
0
0
9
23
24
25
TRE/PAN Rate 0.05 - 10.0, note*2
TRE/PAN Depth 0 - 127
1 - 222
80
64
127
10
11
4
DiscNoise LPF 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*1)0 - 17
17
0
0 - 127
0 - 127
DiscNoise Level 0 - 127
0 - 127
Output Level
0 - 127
RadioNoise Detune
0 - 127
0 - 127
0
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
5
RadioNoise Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
1
6
7
Noise Type
Noise LPF
WHITE, PINK
200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*1)
7 5 :JD Mu lti
0 - 17
17
0
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
8
Noise Level
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Balance
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 30
1
2
SEQUENCE
DS Switch
PH Switch
SP Switch
EH Switch
DSType
0 - 23
0 - 23
0 - 1
0
16
17
15
18
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
D100:0W - D0:100W
0 - 127
15
15
100
127
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
(*1)
1
0 - 30
6
0 - 1
1
0 - 100
0 - 127
12
20
3
0 - 1
1
Output Level
0 - 1
1
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
0 - 6
0
4
DSDrive
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 99
0 - 100
1 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 4
50
50
42
50
10
50
50
0
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
5
DSLevel
0 - 100
7
PH Manual
PH Mix Level
PH Rate
50 Hz - 15.0 kHz
0 - 100
11
8
0.1 - 10.0 Hz
0 - 100
9
PH Depth
10
19
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
PH Resonance 1 - 100
SP BandWidth 1 - 5
Spectrum 250Hz -15 - +15 dB
Spectrum 500Hz -15 - +15 dB
Spectrum 1000Hz -15 - +15 dB
Spectrum 2000Hz -15 - +15 dB
Spectrum 4000Hz -15 - +15 dB
Spectrum 8000Hz -15 - +15 dB
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 100
0 - 100
15
15
15
15
15
15
50
50
EH Sens
0 - 100
0 - 100
EH Mix level
9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
7
8
OD/DS Drive
OD/DS Tone
OD/DS Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
64
50
80
1
7 8 :Gu ita r Am p Sim u la to r
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
9
1
2
3
4
5
9
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
10
11
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
Amp Type
(*1)
0 - 13
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 2
2
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN, 2-STACK, 3STACK
0 - 3
0
Amp Volume
Amp Master
Amp Gain
0 - 127
90
100
1
12
13
14
15
16
DLY Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
0 - 127
DLY TimeLeft
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 98
3013
3010
59
LOW, MID, HIGH
DLY TimeRight 0 - 3000 ms, note*2
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
Amp Presence
0 - 127
(Match Drive: -127 - 0)
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
10
6
Amp Bright
Amp Bass
Amp Middle
Amp Treble
OFF, ON
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
64
75
1
17
50
1
7
17
18
19
21
22
23
20
26
24
25
28
27
DLY Balance
CH/FL Switch
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
D100:0W - D0:100W
OFF, ON
0 - 100
0 - 1
8
11
12
13
14
15
17
16
Speaker Switch OFF, ON
Speaker Type (*2)
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
0 - 15
0 - 2
6
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
Mic Setting
Mic Level
1, 2, 3
1
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
L64 - 63R
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
0
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
Mic Direct
Output Level
Output Pan
CH/FL PreDelay 0.0 - 100 ms
CH/FL Balance D100:0W - D0:100W
CH/FL FilterType OFF, LPF, HPF
127
64
CH/FL Cutoff
Output Level
Output Pan
200 - 8000 Hz (*2)
0 - 127
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
7
(*1) JC-120, Clean Twin, Match Drive, BG Lead, MS1959I, MS1959II,
MS1959I+II, SLDN Lead, Metal 5150, Metal Lead, OD-1, OD-2
Turbo, Distortion, Fuzz
127
64
L64 - 63R
(*2) Small1, Small2, Middle, JC-120, Built In 1, Built In 2, Built In 3,
Built In 4, Built In 5, BG Stack 1, BG Stack 2, MS Stack 1, MS
Stack 2, Metal Stack, 2 Stack, 3 Stack
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
7 9 :Ste re o O ve rd rive
8 2 :Gu ita r Mu lti B
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
OD Drive
OD Tone
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
50
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
COMP Switch OFF, ON
COMP Attack 0 - 127
COMP Sustain 0 - 127
COMP Level 0 - 127
OD/DS Switch OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
127
80
1
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
0 - 3
0
5
6
7
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
15
15
127
OD/DS Type
OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION
0 - 1
0
7
8
OD/DS Drive
OD/DS Tone
OD/DS Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
50
80
1
9
10
11
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
8 0 :Ste re o Disto rtio n
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,2-STACK, 3STACK
0 - 3
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0
1
2
3
4
DS Drive
DS Tone
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
50
1
12
13
16
17
14
15
18
19
21
22
23
20
26
24
25
28
27
EQ Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
EQ Low Gain
EQ Mid Gain
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Freq
EQ Mid Q
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 16
0 - 4
15
15
15
7
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,
2-STACK, 3-STACK
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 3
3
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
OFF, ON
5
6
7
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Gain
Output Level
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 127
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 127
15
15
127
0
CH/FL Switch
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
0 - 1
1
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
8 1 :Gu ita r Mu lti A
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
CH/FL PreDelay 0.0 - 100 ms
CH/FL Balance D100:0W - D0:100W
CH/FL FilterType OFF, LPF, HPF
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
5
6
COMP Switch OFF, ON
COMP Attack 0 - 127
COMP Sustain 0 - 127
COMP Level 0 - 127
OD/DS Switch OFF, ON
OD/DS Type
0 - 1
1
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
127
80
1
CH/FL Cutoff
Output Level
Output Pan
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0 - 127
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
7
127
64
L64 - 63R
OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
0 - 1
0
9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
18
20
21
22
19
25
23
24
27
26
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0 Hz
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
8 3 :Gu ita r Mu lti C
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
OD/DS Switch OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
CH/FL PreDly 0.0 - 100 ms
OD/DS Type
OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION
0 - 1
0
CH/FL Balance D100:0E - D0:100E
CH/FL FilterType OFF, LPF, HPF
3
4
OD/DS Drive
OD/DS Tone
OD/DS Level
AW Switch
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
OFF, ON
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
50
64
1
CH/FL FiltCut
Output Level
Output Pan
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0 - 127
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
7
5
127
64
6
L64 - 63R
7
AW FilterType LPF, BPF
0 - 1
0
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
8
AW Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
20
0
9
AW Depth
AW Sens
AW Manual
AW Peak
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
10
11
12
13
14
32
32
50
1
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
8 5 :Cle a n Gu ita r Mu lti B
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,2-STACK, 3STACK
0 - 3
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
0
1
2
AW Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 1
0 - 1
1
15
16
17
18
19
DLY Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
AW FilterType LPF, BPF
0
DLY TimeLeft
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 98
3013
3010
59
3
AW Rate
0.05 - 10.00 Hz, note*2 1 - 222
20
0
DLY TimeRight 0 - 3000 ms, note*2
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
4
AW Depth
AW Sens
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
5
0 - 127
32
32
50
1
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*1)
0 - 17
17
50
1
6
AW Manual
AW Peak
0 - 127
20
21
22
24
25
26
23
29
27
28
31
30
DLY Bal
D100:0W - D0:100W
OFF, ON
0 - 100
0 - 1
7
0 - 127
CH/FL Switch
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
8
EQ Switch
EQ LowGain
EQ MidGain
EQ HighGain
EQ MidFreq
EQ MidQ
OFF, ON
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
9
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
OFF, ON
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 16
0 - 4
15
15
15
7
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
12
13
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
CH/FL PreDly 0.0 - 100 ms
0
CH/FL Balanc D100:0W - D0:100W
CH/FL FilterType OFF, LPF, HPF
DLY Switch
DLY TimeLeft
0 - 1
1
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 98
3013
3010
59
CH/FL Cutoff
Output Level
Output Pan
200 - 8000 Hz (*2)
0 - 127
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
7
DLY TimeRight 0 - 3000 ms, note*2
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
127
64
L64 - 63R
DLY HFDamp 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*2)
0 - 17
17
50
1
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, BYPASS
19
20
21
23
24
25
22
28
26
27
30
29
DLY Balance
CH/FL Switch
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
D100:0W - D0:100W
OFF, ON
0 - 100
0 - 1
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
8 4 :Cle a n Gu ita r Mu lti A
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
CH/FL PreDly 0.0 - 100 ms
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
CH/FL Balance D100:0W - D0:100W
CH/FL FiltType OFF, LPF, HPF
1
2
COMP Switch OFF, ON
COMP Attack 0 - 127
COMP Sustain 0 - 127
0 - 1
1
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
127
80
1
CH/FL FiltCut
Output Level
Output Pan
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0 - 127
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
7
3
127
64
4
COMP Level
EQ Switch
0 - 127
L64 - 63R
5
OFF, ON
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
6
EQ Low Gain
EQ Mid Gain
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Freq
EQ Mid Q
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
OFF, ON
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 16
0 - 4
15
15
15
7
9
(*2) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz, BYPASS
10
7
8
0
11
12
13
14
15
DLY Switch
DLY TimeLeft
0 - 1
1
0 - 3000 ms, note*2
0 - 3022
0 - 3022
0 - 98
3013
3010
59
DLY TimeRight 0 - 3000 ms, note*2
DLY Feedback -98 - +98%
DLY HF Damp 200 - 8000 Hz, BYPASS (*2)
0 - 17
17
50
1
16
17
DLY Balance
CH/FL Switch
D100:0E - D0:100E
OFF, ON
0 - 100
0 - 1
9 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
8 6 :Ba ss Mu lti
8 8 :Ste re o Sp e ctru m
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
1
2
3
4
5
6
COMP Switch OFF, ON
COMP Attack 0 - 127
COMP Sustain 0 - 127
COMP Level 0 - 127
OD/DS Switch OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
1
2
250Hz Gain
500Hz Gain
1000HzGain
1250HzGain
2000HzGain
3150HzGain
4000HzGain
8000HzGain
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 4
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
0
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
127
80
1
3
4
5
OD/DS Type
OVERDRIVE,DISTORTION
6
0 - 1
0
7
7
8
OD/DS Drive
OD/DS Level
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
64
80
1
8
9
Band Width Q 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
Output Level 0 - 127
9
AmpSim Switch OFF, ON
10
0 - 127
127
10
AmpSim Type SMALL, BUILT-IN,2-STACK
0 - 2
0
11
12
15
16
13
14
17
18
20
21
22
19
25
23
24
27
26
EQ Switch
OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
8 9 :3 D Au to Sp in
EQ Low Gain
EQ Mid Gain
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Freq
EQ Mid Q
-15 - +15 dB
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 30
0 - 16
0 - 4
15
15
15
7
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
-15 - +15 dB
1
2
3
4
5
6
AutoSpin Azimuth L180 - R180 (*1)
AutoSpin Speed 0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
AutoSpin Clockwise -, +
0 - 30
1 - 222
0 - 1
15
26
1
-15 - +15 dB
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
OFF, ON
0
AutoSpin Turn OFF, ON
0 - 1
1
CH/FL Switch
CH/FL Type
CH/FL Rate
CH/FL Depth
0 - 1
1
Output Mode
Output Level
SPEAKER, PHONES
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
CHORUS, FLANGER
0.05 - 10.0 Hz, note*2
0 - 127
0 - 1
0
0 - 127
127
1 - 222
0 - 127
0 - 98
0 - 125
0 - 100
0 - 2
10
20
89
10
50
0
(*1) L180, L168, L156, L144, L132, L120, L108, L96, L84, L72, L60,
L48, L36, L24, L12, 0, R12, R24, R36, R48, R60, R72, R84, R96,
R108, R120, R132, R144, R156, R168, R180
CH/FL Feedback -98 - +98%
CH/FL PreDly 0.0 - 100 ms
CH/FL Balance D100:0W - D0:100W
CH/FL FilterType OFF, LPF, HPF
9 0 :3 D Ma n u a l
CH/FL FiltCut
Output Level
200 - 8000 Hz (*1)
0 - 127
0 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127
7
127
64
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
COMP Switch OFF, ON
1
2
3
AutoSpin Azimuth L180 - R180 (*1)
0 - 30
0 - 1
15
0
Output Mode
Output Level
SPEAKER, PHONES
0 - 127
(*1) 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000 Hz
0 - 127
127
(*1) L180, L168, L156, L144, L132, L120, L108, L96, L84, L72, L60,
L48, L36, L24, L12, 0, R12, R24, R36, R48, R60, R72, R84, R96,
R108, R120, R132, R144, R156, R168, R180
8 7 :Iso la to r 2
No.
Parameter
Setting Value
Value Dec.
Initial
note*1
3
2
Boost/Cut Low -60 - +4 dB
Boost/Cut Mid -60 - +4 dB
Boost/Cut High -60 - +4 dB
AntiPhase LowSW OFF, ON
AntiPhase Lev 0 - 127
AntiPhase MidSW OFF, ON
AntiPhase Lev 0 - 127
0 - 64
0 - 64
0 - 64
0 - 1
60
60
60
0
(Eighth-note triplet),
(Half-note triplet), (Dotted eighth note), (Quarter note),
(Dotted quarter note), (Half note),
(Sixteenth note),
(Dotted sixteenth note), (Eighth note),
1
(Half-note triplet),
6
7
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
0
4
5
0 - 127
0 - 1
127
0
8
Filter Switch
Filter Type
Filter Cutoff
OFF, ON
9
OFF, LPF, HPF
0 - 127
0 - 3
1
11
12
10
13
14
15
16
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 1
80
0
note*2
Filter Resonance 0 - 127
Filter Slope
Filter Gain
-12, -24 dB
0 - 24 dB
0
(Sixty-fourth-note triplet),
(Thirty-second note),
(Sixty-fourth note),
(Thirty-second-note triplet),
(Dotted thirty-second note),
(Dotted sixteenth note),
0 - 24
0 - 1
0
LowBoost Switch OFF, ON
LowBoost Level 0 - 127
0
(Sixteenth-note triplet),
0 - 127
0 - 127
127
127
Output Level
0 - 127
(Eighth-note triplet),
(Quarter-note triplet),
(Half-note triplet),
(Sixteenth note),
(Eighth note),
(Dotted eighth note),
(Quarter note),
(Dotted quarter note),
(Half note),
(Whole-note triplet),
(Double-note triplet),
(Dotted half note),
(Whole note),
(Double note)
(Dotted whole note),
9 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
9 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
In stru m e n t list (GM2 / N a tive m o d e )
Pia n o
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
1
0
1
2
96
96
96
Piano 1
Piano 1w
Piano 1d
1
1
1
97
97
97
Ac.Piano
Ac.Piano w
Mild Piano
1
1
1
98
98
98
St.Piano 1
St.Piano 1w
European Pf
2
2
4
99
99
99
SD Piano
SD Piano w
Classic Pf
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
0
1
96
96
Piano 2
Piano 2w
1
1
97
97
Rock Piano
Rock Piano w
1
1
98
98
St.Piano 2
St.Piano 2w
2
2
99
99
Enh.Piano 2
Enh.Piano 2w
2
2
0
1
96
96
Piano 3
Piano 3w
1
1
97
97
E.Grand Pf
E.Grand Pf w
2
2
98
98
SA Piano
SA Piano w
2
2
99
99
Enh.E Grand
Enh.E Grandw
2
2
0
1
96
96
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk w
2
2
97
97
Old Honky
Old Honky w
2
2
98
98
St.Honky
St.Honky w
4
4
99
99
Brite Honky
Brite Honkyw
3
3
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
E.Piano 1
3
2
1
2
97
97
97
97
Soft Rhodes
Fat Rhodes
Rhodes Wide
Wurly Soft
2
3
2
2
98
98
98
98
Tremo Rhodes 2
99
99
99
99
Stage 73
NY Rhodes
Phase Dyno
Whirly
3
2
1
2
Detuned EP1
Dyno Rhodes
60’s E.Piano
Sweet Tynes
Tremo Dyno
Tremo Wurly
3
4
2
6
0
1
2
3
4
96
96
96
96
96
E.Piano 2
Detuned EP2
E.Piano 2v
EP Legend
EP Phase
2
3
2
2
2
97
97
97
97
97
FM E.Piano
Soft FM EP
SA E.Piano
EP Legend 2
EP Phase 2
2
3
2
3
2
98
98
98
98
98
FM Hard EP
Brite FM EP
Brite FM EP2
EP Legend 3
EP Phase 3
1
2
2
4
3
99
99
99
99
99
Chorus EP
Phase FM EP
Wah FM EP
Enh.Legend
Phasing EP
1
2
2
3
2
7
8
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Harpsichord
Coupl hps
Harpsi w
1
2
1
1
97
97
97
97
Harpsi 2
2
4
2
2
98
98
98
98
St.Harpsichd
St.Coupl hps
St.Harpsi w
St.Harpsi o
2
4
2
2
99
99
99
99
Enh.Harpsi
Enh.Coupl hp
Enh.Harpsi w
Enh.Harpsi o
2
4
2
2
Coupl hps 2
Harpsi 2 w
Harpsi 2 o
Harpsi o
0
96
Clav
1
97
Atack Clav 1
2
98
Atack Clav 2
2
99
Comp Clav
2
1
96
Pulse Clav
1
97
AnalogClav 1
1
98
AnalogClav 2
2
99
Wah Ana.Clav
2
Ch ro m a tic p e rcu ssio n
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
9
0
0
0
96
96
96
Celesta
1
1
1
97
97
97
Celesta 2
2
2
2
98
98
98
St.Celesta
3
3
3
99
99
99
SpaceCelesta
Trem.Glocken
Panning Box
3
3
3
10
11
12
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Glocken 2
Music Box 2
St.Glocken
St.Music Box
0
96
Vibraphone
1
97
Vibraphone 2
2
98
St.Vibra
2
99
Trem.Vibra
2
1
96
Vibraphone w
1
97
Vibraphone2w
2
98
St.Vibra w
2
99
Trem.Vibra w
2
13
0
96
Marimba
1
97
Marimba 2
2
98
St.Marimba
3
99
Enh.Marimba
3
1
96
Marimba w
1
97
Marimba 2 w
2
98
St.Marimba w
3
99
Enh.Marimbaw
3
14
15
0
96
Xylophone
1
97
Xylophone 2
2
98
St.Xylophone
4
99
Enh.Xylophon
4
0
1
2
96
96
96
Tubular-bell
Church Bell
Carillon
1
1
1
97
97
97
Tubular-bel2
Church Bell2
Carillon 2
2
2
2
98
98
98
St.Tubular
St.Church
St.Carillon
3
4
4
99
99
99
Trem.Tubula
Echo Church
Trm.Carillon
3
4
4
16
0
96
Santur
1
97
Santur 2
2
98
St.Santur
3
99
Enh.Santur
3
O rg a n
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
17
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Organ 1
2
2
1
2
97
97
97
97
Perky
Ballad B
Happy 60s
Tone Wheel
2
3
1
2
98
98
98
98
Roller
Rocker
Soft60’Organ
Full Stops
3
4
1
2
99
99
99
99
Perky Spin
Gospel Spin
96 Year
2
3
1
2
Detuned Or1
Organ 60
Organ 4
Tone Wh.Solo
18
0
1
2
96
96
96
Organ 2
Detuned Or2
Organ 5
2
2
3
97
97
97
Jazz Organ 1
Perc.Organ 1
Dist.JzOrg 1
3
3
2
98
98
98
Jazz Organ 2
Perc.Organ 2
Dist.JzOrg 2
2
3
2
99
99
99
Jazzy Spin
Jazzy Spin 2
Jazzy Spin 3
2
3
2
19
20
0
96
Organ 3
1
97
Organ 3 fast
1
98
Rock Organ
3
99
Rocker Spin
3
0
1
2
96
96
96
Church 1
Church 2
Church 3
1
2
1
97
97
97
Pipe Organ 1
LargeChurch1
SmallChurch1
2
4
2
98
98
98
Pipe Organ 2
LargeChurch2
SmallChurch2
3
3
4
99
99
99
Amb.Church
Amb.Church 2
Amb.Church 3
4
4
4
21
22
0
1
96
96
Reed Organ
Puff Organ
1
2
97
97
Reed Organ 2
Organ Flute
2
1
98
98
Reed Organ 3
Theater
3
4
99
99
Old Reed Org
Enh.Theater
3
4
0
96
Accordion F
1
97
French Acc
2
98
St.FrenchAcc
3
99
Enh.French
3
1
96
Accordion I
1
97
It Muset
2
98
St.It Muset
3
99
Enh.ItMuset
3
23
24
0
0
96
96
Harmonica
Bandneon
1
2
97
97
Harmonica 2
Bandneon 1
1
2
98
98
St.Harmonica
St.Bandneon
3
4
99
99
Ld.Harmonica
3
Enh.Bandneon 4
9 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Gu ita r
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
25
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Nylon Gt
Ukulele
Nylon o
1
1
2
1
97
97
97
97
Nylon Gt 2
Ukulele 2
Nylon 2 o
1
1
2
1
98
98
98
98
Nylon Gt 3
Ukulele 3
Nylon 3 o
1
1
2
2
99
99
99
99
Enh.Nylon Gt
Enh.Ukulele
Enh.Nylon o
Enh.Gut Gt
1
1
2
2
Nylon Gt.2
Hard Gut Gt
Hard Gut Gt2
26
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Steel-str.Gt
12-Str.Gt
Mandolin
1
2
2
2
97
97
97
97
OV Steel Gt
12-Str.Gt 2
Mandolin 2
Steel+Body 2
1
2
2
2
98
98
98
98
SteelStr.Gt2
12-Str.Gt 3
Mandolin 3
Steel+Body 3
1
3
2
2
99
99
99
99
Comp OVSteel
3D 12-Str.Gt
Enh.Mandolin
DelayedSteel
1
2
2
2
Steel+Body
27
28
0
1
96
96
Jazz Gt
Pedal Steel
1
1
97
97
Jazz Gt 2
Pedal Steel2
1
2
98
98
Jazz Gt 3
Pedal Steel3
1
2
99
99
Lead Jazz Gt
Hawaian Gt
1
1
0
1
2
96
96
96
Clean Rear
Clean Half
Mid Tone Gt
1
1
1
97
97
97
TC Rear
TC Front
TC Front 2
1
1
1
98
98
98
Strat2 Rear
Chorus Clean
335
1
2
1
99
99
99
Old Clean Gt
Jazz Chorus
335 Drive
1
1
1
29
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Muted Gt
Funk Gt
Funk Gt 2
Jazz Man
1
1
1
2
97
97
97
97
TC Mute Gt
FunkGt Slap
Funk Pop
1
2
1
2
98
98
98
98
TC Mute Gt 2
FunkGt.Slap2
Funk Pop 2
2
2
2
1
99
99
99
99
Comp Mute Gt
Enh.Funk Gt
Wah Funk Pop
Solo Jazz Gt
2
2
2
1
Mute Jazz Gt
Slap Jazz Gt
30
31
0
1
96
96
Overdrive Gt
Gt.Pinch
1
1
97
97
Atk Drive Gt
Gt.Pinch 2
2
1
98
98
OverdriveGt2
Gt.Pinch 3
2
2
99
99
TC Lead Gt
Gt.PinchLead
1
1
0
1
2
96
96
96
DistortionGt
Feedback Gt
DistRythm Gt
1
2
1
97
97
97
Atk Dist Gt
FeedbackGt 2
Muted Dist
2
3
2
98
98
98
Dist.Gt 2
Feedback OD
Muted Dist 2
2
3
2
99
99
99
Heavy DistGt
Feedbacker
Muted OD
1
3
1
32
0
96
Gt.Harmonics
1
97
Gt.Harm 2
2
98
Gt.OctHarm
2
99
Amp.Harm
2
1
96
Gt.Feedback
1
97
FeedbackOct
2
98
FeedbackHarm
2
99
Amp.FeedBack
2
Ba ss
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
2
MSB Enhance Set Voices
33
34
0
96
Acoustic Bs
1
97
Rockabilly
2
98
Fat Aco.Bass
99
Enh.Aco Bass
1
0
96
Fingered Bs
1
97
Fingered Bs2
1
98
Jazz Bass
1
99
Pre Bass
1
1
96
FingerJ.Bass
2
97
FingerP.Bass
2
98
Finger Slap
2
99
Comp Finger
2
35
36
37
38
39
0
0
0
0
96
96
96
96
Picked Bass
Fretless Bs
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
1
1
1
2
97
97
97
97
Picked Jz Bs
Fretless Bs2
Slap Pop 1
1
2
1
2
98
98
98
98
Picking Bass
PhaseFrtless
Jazz Slap
2
3
2
2
99
99
99
99
Rock Bass
2
1
2
2
Cho.Fretless
Phase Slap
Enh.Slap Pop
Funky Slap
Slap Pop 2
0
1
2
3
4
96
96
96
96
96
Synth Bass 1
SynthBass101
Acid Bass
Clavi Bass
Hammer
2
1
1
2
2
97
97
97
97
97
MG303 Bass
MG Bass
MG Acid Bass
Clavi Bass 2
OB Hammer
2
1
1
2
2
98
98
98
98
98
Fat Syn.Bass
SynthSaw Bs
AcidBs Dirty
Clavi Bass 3
MG Hammer
2
1
1
2
2
99
99
99
99
99
Dist303 Bass
P.Shift Bass
Acid Dist Bs
PhaseClaviBs
Enh.Hammer
2
1
1
2
2
40
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Synth Bass 2
Beef FM Bs
Rubber Bass
Attack Pulse
2
2
2
1
97
97
97
97
Seq101 Bass
Beef Slap Bs
Rubber Bass2
Attack Saw
2
2
3
1
98
98
98
98
Sq SynthBass
Beef Saw Bs
JpSaw Rubber
Attack MG Bs
2
3
2
2
99
99
99
99
PhaseSq Bass
Enh.Beef Bs
Fat JpSaw Bs
Enh.MG Bass
2
3
2
2
Strin g s / o rch e stra
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
41
0
96
Violin
1
97
Violin vib
1
98
Violin 2 vib
1
99
Enh.Violin
1
1
96
Slow Violin
1
97
Slow Vln vib
1
98
SlowVln2 vib
1
99
Enh.Slow Vln
1
42
43
44
45
46
47
0
0
0
0
0
96
96
96
96
96
Viola
1
1
1
2
1
97
97
97
97
97
Viola vib
Cello vib
Cb vib
1
1
1
3
2
98
98
98
98
98
Viola2 vib
Cello2 vib
Cb2 vib
1
1
1
2
3
99
99
99
99
99
Enh.Viola
Enh.Cello
Enh.Cb
1
1
1
4
1
Cello
Contrabass
Tremolo Str
Pizzicato
Tremolo Str2
Pizzicato 2
St.Trem Str
St.Pizzicato
St.Trem Str2
Chorus Pizz
0
96
Harp
1
97
Harp 2
2
98
St.Harp
3
99
Chorus Harp
1
1
96
Yangqin
1
97
Yangqin 2
2
98
St.Yangqin
3
99
Enh.Yangqin
1
48
0
96
Timpani
1
97
Timpani 2
2
98
St.Timpani
3
99
Enh.Timpani
3
9 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
En se m b le
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
49
0
1
2
96
96
96
Strings
Orchestra
60’Strings
2
2
2
97
97
97
Strings 2
Orchestra 2
Oct.Strings
3
3
2
98
98
98
St.Strings
St.Orchestra
St.OctStr 1
2
5
6
99
99
99
St.Strings 2
St.Orchestr2
St.OctStr 2
4
7
6
50
51
0
96
Slow Strings
1
97
SlowStrings2
2
98
St.Slow Str
2
99
St.Slow Str2
4
0
96
Syn.Strings1
2
97
BriteSyn.Str
2
98
StackSyn.Str
3
99
JP Strings
2
1
96
Syn.Strings3
3
97
Oct.SynStr 1
4
98
Oct.SynStr 2
7
99
PhaseSyn.Str
4
52
53
0
96
Syn.Strings2
2
97
Warm SynStr1
4
98
Warm SynStr2
6
99
OB Strings
4
0
96
Choir Aahs
1
97
Large Choir
2
98
St.ChoirAahs
4
99
Rich Choir
8
1
96
Choir Aahs 2
2
97
Small Choir
2
98
St.Sm Choir
2
99
St.Sm Choir2
5
54
55
56
0
1
96
96
Voices Oohs
Hamming
1
2
97
97
Voices Oohs 2
Hamming 2
2
2
98
98
St.Vox Oohs
St.Hamming
3
4
99
99
Enh.Vox Oohs
Enh.Hamming
1
2
0
1
96
96
SynVox
Ana Voices
1
1
97
97
SynVox 2
Ana Voices 2
1
1
98
98
St.SynVox
Ana Voices 3
2
2
99
99
Phase SynVox
Lead Ana.Vox
1
2
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Orchestrahit
Bass Hit
6th Hit
2
3
2
2
97
97
97
97
Orc Hit 2
Bass Hit 2
6th Hit 2
2
2
2
2
98
98
98
98
St.Orc Hit
St.Bass Hit
St.6th Hit
3
3
4
4
99
99
99
99
Enh.Orc Hit
PhaseBassHit
Dly.6th Hit
3
3
4
4
Euro Hit
Euro Hit 2
St.Euro Hit
Dly.Euro Hit
Bra ss
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
57
0
96
Trumpet
1
97
Solo Trumpet
1
98
Romantic Tp
1
99
Enh.Trumpet
1
1
96
Dark Trumpet
1
97
Mild Trumpet
2
98
Tp.Dark vib
1
99
Warm Trumpet
2
58
0
1
2
96
96
96
Trombone
Trombone 2
Brite Bone
1
1
1
97
97
97
Solo Bone
Solo Bone 2
Brite Bone 2
1
1
2
98
98
98
Trombone vib
Trombone2vib
Br.Bone vib
1
1
2
99
99
99
Enh.Trombone 1
Enh.Bone 2
Enh.Br Bone
1
2
59
60
0
96
Tuba
1
97
Tuba 2
2
98
Tuba vib
2
99
Chorus Tuba
2
0
96
MuteTrumpet
1
97
MuteTrumpet2
1
98
Solo MutedTp
2
99
Enh.Muted Tp
2
1
96
MuteTrumpet2
1
97
Harmon Mute
2
98
Harmon Mute2
2
99
Enh.MutedTp2
2
61
62
63
0
1
96
96
French Horns
Fr.Horn
1
2
97
97
FrenchHorns2
MildFr.Horns
2
2
98
98
St.Fr Horns
St.Fr Horns2
3
3
99
99
Enh.StFrHorn
Warm Horns
3
3
0
1
96
96
Brass 1
Brass 2
2
2
97
97
Brass FF
BrassSection
2
3
98
98
St.Brass
St.Brass 2
2
5
99
99
St.Big Brass
Enh.Brs Sect
4
4
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
SynthBrass 1
SynthBrass 3
Oct.SynBrass
Jump Brass
2
2
2
1
97
97
97
97
JP Syn.Brass
JPSyn.Brass2
OctSynBrass2
80’s Brass
3
2
3
1
98
98
98
98
Hyper Brass
Stack Brass
OctSynBrass3
SuperSaw Brs
4
4
3
3
99
99
99
99
SuperJP Brs1
Lead Brass
Phase OctBrs
SuperJP Brs2
3
2
3
3
64
0
1
2
96
96
96
SynthBrass 2
SynthBrass 4
Velo Brass
2
2
2
97
97
97
MG Syn.Horn
OB Syn.Horn
CS Syn.Brass
2
2
2
98
98
98
Warm SynHorn 3
99
99
99
WarmSynHorn23
Rich SynHorn
P5 Syn.Brass
5
3
Phase Horn
Fat Pro Bras
5
3
Re e d
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
Soprano Sax2
Breathy Alto
BreathyTenor
Barely Bari
Brite Oboe
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
Sop.Sax vib
AltoSoft vib
Blow Tenor
Bari.Sax vib
Classic Oboe
E.Horn vib
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
Enh.Sop Sax
Enh.Alto Sax
Enh.TenorSax
Enh.Bari Sax
Enh.Oboe
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Tenor Sax
Bariton Sax
Oboe
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
Clarinet
EnglishHorn2
Bassoon 2
Enh.E Horn
Enh.Bassoon
Jz.Clarinet2
Bassoon vib
JazzClarinet
Br.Clarinet
Pip e
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
Piccolo
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
Piccolo 2
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
1
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
Piccolo vib
Flute vib
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
Enh.Piccolo
Enh.Flute
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
Flute
Flute 2
Recorder
Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Recorder 2
Pan Flute 2
Bottle Blow2
Shakuhachi 2
Whistle 2
Recorder vib
PanFlute vib
Bottle vib
Enh.Recorder
Cho.PanFlute
Phase Bottle
Delay Shaku
DelayWhistle
DelayOcarina
Shaku.vib
Whistle vib
Ocarina vib
Ocarina
Ocarina 2
9 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Sy n th le a d
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
81
0
1
2
96
96
96
Square Wave
Square
Sine Wave
2
1
1
97
97
97
MG Square
Fat Square
2600 Sine
2
3
1
98
98
98
OB Square
Fat Square2
2600 Sine 2
3
3
2
99
99
99
OBSquareLead 3
Phase Square
Sine Lead
3
2
82
0
1
2
3
4
96
96
96
96
96
Saw Wave
Saw
Doctor Solo
Natural Lead
1
1
1
2
97
97
97
97
97
JP Saw Wave
MG Saw
Fat Saw Solo
P5 Saw Lead
MG Sequence
2
2
2
2
2
98
98
98
98
98
Oct.JP Saw
Hybrid Saw
Hybrid Solo
MG Saw Lead
DelaySeqence
3
3
3
3
2
99
99
99
99
99
KeySync Saw
Flanging Saw
Doctor Lead
Fat Saw Lead
PhaseSeqence
2
3
3
3
2
SequencedSaw 2
83
84
85
0
0
96
96
Syn.Calliope
Chiffer Lead
2
2
97
97
SynCalliope2
ChifferLead2
3
4
98
98
SynCalliope3
ChifferLead3
4
6
99
99
LeadCalliope
Chiffers
4
6
0
96
Charang
3
97
Charang 2
3
98
Charang 3
4
99
Charang Lead
3
1
96
Wire Lead
2
97
Wire Lead 2
3
98
Wire Lead 3
4
99
Phase Wire
4
86
87
88
0
0
96
96
Solo Vox
4
3
97
97
Solo Vox 2
6
3
98
98
Solo Vox 3
5
6
99
99
SoloVox Lead
Flanging 5th
5
6
5th SawWave
5th SawWave2
5th SawWave3
0
96
Bass & Lead
2
97
Bass & Lead2
2
98
Bass & Lead3
4
99
Phase BsLead
4
1
96
DelayedLead
2
97
DelayedLead2
2
98
DelayedLead3
3
99
Suffle Lead
2
Sy n th p a d , e tc.
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
4
MSB Enhance Set Voices
89
90
0
96
Fantasia
2
97
Fantasia 2
3
98
Fantasia 3
99
New Fantasia
3
0
96
Warm Pad
2
97
Warm Pad 2
2
98
Warm Pad 3
4
99
Phase Pad
4
1
96
Sine Pad
2
97
Sine Pad 2
2
98
Sine Pad 3
3
99
Chorus Sine
2
91
92
0
96
Polysynth
2
97
Polysynth 2
2
98
Polysynth 3
3
99
KeySyncSynth 3
0
96
SpaceVoices
1
97
SpaceVoices 2 3
98
SpaceVoices 3 5
99
Phase Voices
4
1
96
Itopia
2
97
Itopia 2
3
3
4
4
2
98
Itopia 3
5
3
4
6
4
99
Pan Itopia
5
93
94
95
96
0
0
0
0
96
96
96
96
BowedGlass
Metal Pad
Halo Pad
2
3
3
2
97
97
97
97
BowedGlass 2
Metal Pad 2
Halo Pad 2
Sweep Pad 2
98
98
98
98
BowedGlass 3
Metal Pad 3
Halo Pad 3
Sweep Pad 3
99
99
99
99
Ring Glass
Space Pad
Phase Halo
Flanging Pad
3
4
6
4
Sweep Pad
Sy n th SFX
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
97
98
99
0
0
96
96
Ice Rain
2
2
97
97
Ice Rain 2
3
2
98
98
Ice Rain 3
4
5
99
99
Reverse Rain
Phase Track
4
5
Soundtrack
Soundtrack 2
Soundtrack 3
0
96
Crystal
2
97
Crystal 2
3
98
Crystal 3
4
99
3D Crystal
4
1
96
Syn Mallet
2
97
Syn Mallet 2
3
98
Syn Mallet 3
3
99
Phase Mallet
3
100
101
102
103
0
0
0
96
96
96
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
2
2
2
97
97
97
Atmosphere 2
Brightness 2
Goblin 2
3
4
3
98
98
98
Atmosphere 3
Brightness 3
Goblin 3
5
6
4
99
99
99
Pan Atmos
Bright Star
Rev Goblin
5
6
4
0
1
2
96
96
96
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
1
2
3
97
97
97
Echo Drops 2
Echo Bell 2
Echo Pan 2
2
3
3
98
98
98
Echo Drops 3
Echo Bell 3
Echo Pan 3
6
5
6
99
99
99
Delay Drops
Delay Bell
Delay Pan
2
3
6
104
0
96
Star Theme
2
97
Star Theme 2
3
98
Star Theme 3
5
99
Phase Theme
3
Eth n ic, e tc.
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
105
0
96
Sitar
1
97
Atk Sitar
2
98
St.Sitar
3
99
Enh.Sitar
3
1
96
Sitar 2
2
97
Atk Sitar 2
3
98
St.Sitar 2
4
99
FantasySitar
3
106
107
108
0
0
96
96
Banjo
1
1
97
97
Banjo 2
2
2
98
98
St.Banjo
3
3
99
99
St.Banjo 2
4
4
Shamisen
Shamisen 2
St.Shamisen
St.Shamisen2
0
96
Koto
1
97
Koto 2
2
98
St.Koto
3
99
St.Koto 2
4
1
96
Taisho Koto
1
97
Taisho Koto2
2
98
St.T Koto
3
99
St.T Koto 2
4
109
110
111
112
0
0
0
0
96
96
96
96
Kalimba
Bag Pipe
Fiddle
1
1
1
1
97
97
97
97
Kalimba 2
Bag Pipe 2
Fiddle vib
Shanai 2
1
1
1
1
98
98
98
98
St.Kalimba
St.Bag Pipe
Fiddle 2 vib
St.Shanai
3
3
1
3
99
99
99
99
Trem.Kalimba
Enh.Bag Pipe
Enh.Fiddle
1
3
1
3
Shanai
Enh.Shanai
9 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Pe rcu ssive
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
113
114
115
116
0
0
0
96
96
96
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
1
1
1
97
97
97
●
●
●
98
98
98
●
●
●
99
99
99
●
●
●
Steel Drums
0
1
96
96
Woodblock
Castanet
1
1
97
97
●
●
98
98
●
●
99
99
●
●
117
118
119
0
1
96
96
Taiko
Concert BD
3
1
97
97
●
●
98
98
●
●
99
99
●
●
0
1
96
96
Melo.Tom 1
Melo.Tom 2
2
1
97
97
●
●
98
98
●
●
99
99
●
●
0
1
2
96
96
96
Synth Drum
808 tom
Elec Perc
1
2
2
97
97
97
●
●
●
98
98
98
●
●
●
99
99
99
●
●
●
120
0
96
Reverse Cym
1
97
●
98
●
99
●
SFX
PC LSB MSB Classic Set Voices
MSB Contemp Set Voices
MSB Solo Set
Voices
MSB Enhance Set Voices
121
0
1
2
96
96
96
GtFret Noise
Gt.Cut Noise
Slap_St.Bass
1
1
1
97
97
97
●
●
●
98
98
98
●
●
●
99
99
99
●
●
●
122
123
0
1
96
96
Breath Noise
Fl.Key Click
1
1
97
97
●
●
98
98
●
●
99
99
●
●
0
1
2
3
4
5
96
96
96
96
96
96
Seashore
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
2
2
2
2
2
2
97
97
97
97
97
97
●
●
●
●
●
●
98
98
98
98
98
98
●
●
●
●
●
●
99
99
99
99
99
99
●
●
●
●
●
●
124
125
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Bird Tweet
Dog
Horse Gallop
Bird Tweet 2
2
1
1
1
97
97
97
97
●
●
●
●
98
98
98
98
●
●
●
●
99
99
99
99
●
●
●
●
0
1
2
3
4
5
96
96
96
96
96
96
Telephone
Telephone 2
Door Creak
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
1
1
1
1
1
2
97
97
97
97
97
97
●
●
●
●
●
●
98
98
98
98
98
98
●
●
●
●
●
●
99
99
99
99
99
99
●
●
●
●
●
●
126
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
Helicopter
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
4
2
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
127
128
0
1
2
3
4
5
96
96
96
96
96
96
Applause
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps
2
1
1
1
1
1
97
97
97
97
97
97
●
●
●
●
●
●
98
98
98
98
98
98
●
●
●
●
●
●
99
99
99
99
99
99
●
●
●
●
●
●
0
1
2
3
96
96
96
96
Gunshot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
1
1
1
2
97
97
97
97
●
●
●
●
98
98
98
98
●
●
●
●
99
99
99
99
●
●
●
●
Explosion
9 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
In stru m e n t list (Sp e cia l so u n d )
*
The asterisk (*) indicates that the same sound is used for the Enhanced sound set in GM2/Native mode.
PC LSB MSB Special 1 Set Voice
LSB MSB
Special 2 Set Voice
PC LSB MSB Special 1 Set Voice
LSB MSB
Special 2 Set Voice
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
D.L.A.Pad
BrushingSaw
Xtremities
Atmostrings
Noo Tongs
Mistery
8
8
4
2
2
1
3
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Blown Bass
Enh.Violin
Solo Violin
Enh.Cello
Overture Str
St.Trem Str2
St.Strings 2
Intim8String
2
1 *
1
1 *
4
4 *
4 *
4
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Elec Gut Gt
Chorus GutGt
Enh.Nylon Gt
CompSteel Gt
Elec Aco.Gt
Hard Steel
1
1
1 *
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
JP-6 Lead
Glassy Saws
Too Pure
Mono Analog
Charang Lead 3 *
Phase Wire
Flanging 5th
BOG
1
3
2
8
1
4 *
6 *
3
EastrnEurope
Harpsi&Str
Comp OVSteel 1 *
DelayedSteel
2 *
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Shout Gt
3
1
1
3
8
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Str&Brs Orch
St.Orchestr2
St.Slow Str2
ChamberPlyrs
Prelude
Tape Strings
JP Strings
PhaseSyn.Str 4 *
5
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Wah Steel Gt
Soft Steel
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Solo Twang
Koto Power
Dulcid Solo
Wine Guitar
Leapin' Keys
New Fantasia 3 *
MilleniumStr
OB Borealis
2
2
2
2
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Clean Chorus
Mid Boost Gt
Guitarvibe
Cluster Sect
Mariachi Tp
NY Tenor
7 *
4 *
4
4
2
Lead Jazz Gt
Hawaian Gt
Solo Jazz Gt
Old Clean Gt
Jazz Chorus
Fat Clean
1 *
1 *
1 *
1 *
1 *
1
2 *
2
4
Jazz Club
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Moody Alto
Fuji Yama
SD Piano
1
4
2 *
6
5
2 *
3 *
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
SciFi Choir
Rich Choir
3
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Space-D Gt
1
1
1
1
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Wet Glass
VintagePhase
P-layer
Ring Glass
5th Atm /Aft
Combing
3
4
4
3 *
2
8 *
5 *
2
2
4
Whammy Gt
Trem&Cho Gt
Long DLY.Gt
Comp FeedBK
ChaseDL Mute
St.Sm Choir2
Tron Choir
ScatterDanze
Choral Brass
Vocal Keys
SampleThe80s
Piano&Str
WarmVoxPiano
Enh.E Grand
Brite Honky
Ambient EP
2
4
3
2
Wah Funk Pop 2 *
Old Blues
Modular Life
KeySync Saw 3 *
1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Phase Dyno
Wah Dyno
Voweling EP
Stage 73
NY Rhodes
Amped Wurlie
Dirty Wurlie
PhaseFlangEP
1 *
2
3
3 *
2 *
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Spectravox
Formantic
Vocoder Wave
2
2
1
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
335 Drive
1 *
1
1
1
1
1 *
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Phase Track
3D Crystal
Bright Star
Technoheadz
Techno Cave
Wedo-Wodo
Dance Sweet
Dancefloor
5 *
4 *
6 *
4
2
4
335 Drive2
SmallAMP OD
CountrySlide
335 Comp
TC Lead Gt
Lead Mild Gt
Crunch Gt
Enh.Muted Tp 2 *
St.Big Brass
ConcertHorns
Brass Orch
Loose Lips
4 *
3
4
4
1
4
3
3
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Dist Wurly
Xmod EP
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Multi Brass
SuperJP Brs1 3 *
SuperJP Brs2 3 *
DragginBrass
Enh.Alto Sax
Enh.TenorSax 1 *
4
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Auto Wah Gt
Folmant Gt
Fuzz Gt
MonoPhase Gt
2 Layer Gt
MonoDLY Dist
Step FLG Gt
335 Fuzz
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Frogcillator
Dance Zipper
Lo-fi Chord
Sliced
Dance Chop
GO WILD!
Tropics
2
4
4
4
3
1
3
2
EP+Followers
Backrhodes
FM Delight
Enh.Legend
Phasing EP
Comp Clav
2
1 *
2
3 *
2 *
2 *
Enh.Bari Sax
Sax's Sect
1 *
4
FM Fx Bells
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Vibarimba
FM layer
2
3
2
4
3
3
3 *
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Reed Romance
U.S.Patrol
Enh.Oboe
Jz.Clarinet2
Enh.Flute
Tron Flutes
Flute&Clari
Orch Reeds
3
4
1 *
1 *
1 *
2
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Drive Funk
Loud & Metal
Heavy DistGt
Power Mute
Muted OD
Combo Drive
Ring Gt.
Scream Drive
2
1
1 *
1
1 *
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
CrystalGlass
Borealis
Circular Pad
Oxigenizer
Quasar
PsycheSweep
Hell Section
DigitalDrone
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
Vibey Flute
Chime Bells
The Big Spin
Roller Spin
Rocker Spin
2
2
1
2
Tone Wh.Solo 2 *
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Purple Spin
RingingOrgan
60's LeadOrg
DistLead Org
Assalt Organ
Perky Spin
4
2
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Delay Shaku
DelayOcarina
DynOrchestra
Celtic Ens
Early Ens
WoodSymphony 7
1 *
1 *
5
5
4
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Gt.Pinch Wah
Power DistGt
Triple Gt
Reverse Harm
Drivin'Uprit
Enh.Aco Bass 1 *
Pre Bass
Comp Finger
1
1
1
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Harp Drop
4
2
3
4 *
4
4
1
2
Runaway Rez
Wacky Pizzer
Reverse Rain
Starburst
Tongan Delay
Cascade
2
2 *
3 *
4
Gospel Spin
Boogie Organ
ViennaWoods2
Stage Woods
3
3
1 *
2 *
Legat●Stacat
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Klubb Organ
96 Year
OrganInStone
StringsOrgan
Cathdr Pipes
Enh.Theater
3
1 *
1
2
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
TremoloFlute
SupportWoods
Fiddle&Oboe
Mono Blues
TravlnFlutes
DistordedSAW
The Leader
3
3
2
3
3
1
3
1
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Octrv Finger
Rock Bass
Dist Bass
Solo Fretles
WahSlapBass
Froggy Bass
3D TB-303
Acid Dist Bs
2
2 *
2
1
1
1
2
1 *
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
Rev Goblin
FantasySitar
Rising Sun
Green Tea
Jimmy's Koto
Fly 2 India
4 *
3 *
4
4
1
3
4
1
4 *
Ld.Harmonica 3 *
Guitar&Str
IndianSpirit
Gt/BsNz MENU
3
SH-2 Lead
1 0 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
In stru m e n t list (GS m o d e )
Pia n o
Gu ita r
En se m b le
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
001
000
008
016
Piano 1
Piano 1w
Piano 1d
1
1
1
025
000
008
016
032
Nylon Gt.
Ukulele
Nylon Gt.o
Nylon Gt.2
1
1
2
1
049
000
008
Strings
Orchestra
1
2
050
051
000
SlowStrings
1
002
003
004
005
000
008
Piano 2
Piano 2w
1
1
000
008
SynStrings1
SynStrings3
1
2
026
000
008
016
Steel Gt.
12-str.Gt
Mandolin
1
2
1
000
008
Piano 3
Piano 3w
1
1
052
053
000
SynStrings2
2
000
032
Choir Aahs
Choir Aahs2
1
1
027
028
029
000
008
Jazz Gt.
Hawaiian Gt
1
1
000
008
Honky-tonk
HonkyTonk w
2
2
054
055
056
000
000
000
Voice Oohs
SynVox
1
1
2
000
008
Clean Gt.
Chorus Gt.
1
2
000
008
016
024
E.Piano 1
1
2
2
1
Detuned EP1
E.Piano 1v
60s E.Piano
000
008
016
Muted Gt.
Funk Gt.
Funk Gt.2
1
1
1
Orchest.Hit
006
007
000
008
016
E.Piano 2
Detuned EP2
E.Piano 2v
1
2
2
Bra ss
PC
030
031
000
OverdriveGt
1
CC00 GS Set
Voices
1
000
008
Dist.Gt.
Feedback Gt
1
2
057
000
Trumpet
000
008
016
024
000
Harpsichord
Coupled Hps
Harpsi.w
Harpsi.o
Clav.
1
2
1
2
1
058
000
001
Trombone
Trombone 2
1
2
032
000
008
Gt.Harmonix
Gt.Feedback
1
1
059
060
061
000
000
Tuba
1
1
008
MuteTrumpet
Ba ss
PC
000
001
French Horn
Fr.Horn 2
2
2
CC00 GS Set
Voices
1
Ch ro m a tic p e rcu ssio n
PC
033
000
000
000
000
000
000
Acoustic Bs
Fingered Bs
Picked Bass
Fretless Bs
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
CC00 GS Set
Voices
1
062
063
000
008
Brass 1
Brass 2
1
2
034
035
036
037
038
039
1
1
1
1
1
009
000
000
000
Celesta
010
011
012
Glockenspl
Music Box
1
1
000
008
016
Syn.Brass 1
Syn.Brass 3
Analog Brs1
2
2
2
000
008
Vibraphone
Vib.w
1
1
064
000
008
016
Syn.Brass 2
Syn.Brass 4
Analog Brs2
2
1
2
013
000
008
Marimba
Marimba w
1
1
000
001
008
Syn.Bass 1
Syn.Bass101
Syn.Bass 3
1
1
1
014
015
000
Xylophone
1
040
000
008
016
Syn.Bass 2
Syn.Bass 4
Rubber Bass
2
2
2
Re e d
PC
000
008
009
Tubularbell
Church Bell
Carillon
1
1
1
CC00 GS Set
Voices
1
065
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
016
000
Santur
1
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Strin g s / o rch e stra
PC
Tenor Sax
BaritoneSax
Oboe
CC00 GS Set
Voices
O rg a n
PC
041
000
008
Violin
Slow Violin
1
1
CC00 GS Set
Voices
017
000
008
016
032
Organ 1
1
2
1
2
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Viola
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Detuned Or1
60's Organ1
Organ 4
Cello
Clarinet
Contrabass
Tremolo Str
Pizzicato
Harp
018
000
008
032
Organ 2
Detuned Or2
Organ 5
1
2
2
Pip e
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
1
019
020
000
Organ 3
2
073
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Piccolo
Timpani
000
008
016
Church Org1
Church Org2
Church Org3
1
2
2
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
Flute
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
Recorder
Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
021
022
000
Reed Organ
1
000
008
Accordion F
Accordion I
2
2
023
024
000
000
Harmonica
Bandoneon
1
2
Ocarina
1 0 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Sy n th le a d
Pe rcu ssive
PC
CC00 GS Map
Voices
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
1
081
000
001
008
Square Wave
Square
Sine Wave
2
1
1
113
000
000
000
Tinkle Bell
114
115
116
Agogo
1
1
Steel Drums
082
000
001
008
Saw Wave
Saw
Doctor Solo
2
1
2
000
Woodblock
1
1
008
Castanets
117
118
119
000
008
Taiko
Concert BD
1
1
083
084
085
086
087
088
000
000
000
000
000
000
SynCalliope
ChifferLead
Charang
2
2
2
2
2
2
000
008
Melo. Tom 1
Melo. Tom 2
1
1
Solo Vox
000
008
009
Synth Drum
808 Tom
Elec Perc
1
1
1
5th Saw
Bass & Lead
120
000
Reverse Cym
1
Sy n th p a d , e tc.
SFX
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
2
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
089
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Fantasia
121
000
001
002
Gt.FretNoiz
Gt.CutNoise
String Slap
1
1
1
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
Warm Pad
Polysynth
Space Voice
Bowed Glass
Metal Pad
Halo Pad
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
122
123
000
BreathNoise
1
001
Fl.KeyClick
1
000
001
002
003
004
005
Seashore
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
1
1
1
1
2
2
Sweep Pad
Sy n th SFX
124
125
000
001
002
003
Bird
Dog
HorseGallop
Bird 2
2
1
1
1
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
2
097
000
000
000
000
000
000
Ice Rain
098
099
100
101
102
103
Soundtrack
Crystal
2
2
2
2
2
000
001
002
003
004
005
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Creaking
Door
Scratch
1
1
1
1
1
2
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
Wind Chimes
000
001
002
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
1
2
2
126
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
Helicopter
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
104
000
Star Theme
2
Eth n ic, e tc.
Train
PC
CC00 GS Set
Voices
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
105
000
Sitar
1
2
001
Sitar 2
106
107
108
000
000
Banjo
1
1
127
128
000
001
002
003
004
005
Applause
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps
2
1
1
1
1
1
Shamisen
000
008
Koto
Taisho Koto
1
2
109
110
111
112
000
000
000
000
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
1
1
1
1
000
001
002
003
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
1
1
1
2
Shanai
Explosion
1 0 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
In stru m e n t list (XGlite m o d e )
*
The instrument names listed here are the proper names for the XGlite sound module mode. Due to the limited number of letters that can be
used for the display, the names shown in the display may be slightly different from the instrument names listed here.
024
032
033
037
70's Percussive Organ 1
Detuned Percussive Organ
Light Organ
2
2
2
2
036
000
032
033
034
Fretless Bass
Fretless Bass 2
Fretless Bass 3
Fretless Bass 4
1
2
2
2
Pia n o
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
001
000
001
040
041
Grand Piano
Grand Piano KSP
Piano Strings
Dream
1
1
2
2
Percussive Organ 2
019
020
000
064
065
066
Rock Organ
Rotary Organ
Slow Rotary
Fast Rotary
2
2
2
2
037
038
039
000
032
Slap Bass 1
Punch Thumb Bass
1
2
000
043
Slap Bass 2
Velocity Switch Slap
1
2
002
003
000
001
Bright Piano
Bright Piano KSP
1
1
000
032
035
040
064
065
Church Organ
Church Organ 3
Church Organ 2
Notre Dame
Organ Flute
Tremolo Organ Flute
2
2
2
2
2
2
000
040
085
Synth Bass 1
Techno Synth Bass
SweePWM
1
2
2
000
001
032
Electric Grand Piano
Electric Grand Piano KSP
Detuned CP80
2
2
2
040
000
006
012
018
019
041
Synth Bass 2
2
1
2
2
1
2
004
005
000
001
Honky-tonk Piano
Honky-tonk Piano KSP
2
2
Mellow Synth Bass
Sequenced Bass
Click Synth Bass
Synth Bass 2 Dark
DX Bass
021
000
040
Reed Organ
Puff Organ
1
2
000
001
032
Electric Piano 1
Electric Piano 1 KSP
Chorus Electric Piano 1
2
1
2
022
023
000
Accordion
2
006
000
001
041
085
Electric Piano 2
Electric Piano 2 KSP
2
1
2
2
000
032
Hamonica
Harmonica 2
1
2
Strin g s / o rch e stra
PC
D
X + Analog Electric Piano
024
000
064
Tango Accordion
Tango Accordion 2
2
2
Tinker DX Plus
CC32 XG Set
Elements
007
008
000
001
035
Harpsichord
Harpsichord KSP
Harpsichord 3
1
1
2
041
000
008
Violin
Slow Violin
1
1
Gu ita r
042
043
044
045
000
000
000
Viola
1
1
1
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
1
000
001
Clavi
Clavi KSP
2
1
Cello
025
000
043
096
Nylon Guitar
Velocity Guitar Harmonics
Cimbalom
Contrabass
2
2
000
008
040
Tremolo Strings
Slow Tremolo Strings
Suspense Strings
1
1
2
Ch ro m a tic p e rcu ssio n
PC
026
000
035
040
041
096
Steel Guitar
12-string Guitar
Nylon & Steel Guitar
Steel Guitar with Body Sound2
Mandolin
1
2
2
CC32 XG Set
Elements
1
009
000
000
Celesta
046
047
000
Pizzicato Strings
1
010
011
Glockenspiel
1
000
040
Orchestral Harp
Yang Chin
1
2
2
000
Music Box
2
027
028
029
000
032
Jazz Guitar
Jazz Amp
1
2
064
Orgel
2
048
000
Timpani
1
012
013
000
001
Vibraphone
Vibraphone KSP
1
1
000
032
Clean Guitar
Chorus Guitar
1
2
En se m b le
PC
000
001
064
097
098
Marimba
1
1
2
2
2
CC32 XG Set
Elements
000
040
041
045
Muted Guitar
Funk Guitar 1
Muted Steel Guitar
Jazz Man
1
2
2
1
Marimba KSP
Sine Marimba
Balimba
049
000
003
008
035
040
041
042
045
Strings 1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
Stereo Strings
Slow Strings
60's Strings
Orchestra
Orchestra 2
Log Drums
030
031
000
043
Overdriven Guitar
Guitar Pinch
1
2
014
015
000
Xylophone
1
000
096
097
Tubular Bells
Church Bells
Carillon
1
2
2
Tremolo Orchestra
Velocity Strings
000
040
041
Distortion Guitar
Feedback Guitar
Feedback Guitar 2
1
2
2
050
000
003
008
040
041
Strings 2
1
2
2
2
2
016
000
035
096
097
Dulcimer
Dulcimer 2
Cimbalom
Santur
1
2
2
2
Stereo Slow Strings
Legato Strings
Warm Strings
Kingdom
032
000
065
066
Guitar Harmonics
Guitar Feedback
Guitar Harmonics 2
1
1
1
051
052
053
000
000
Synth Strings 1
Synth Strings 2
2
2
Ba ss
O rg a n
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
1
000
003
032
040
Choir Aahs
Stereo Choir
Mellow Choir
Choir Strings
1
2
2
2
033
000
040
045
Acoustic Bass
Jazz Rhythm
Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
2
1
2
017
000
032
033
034
035
037
040
064
065
066
067
Drawbar Organ
Detuned Drawbar Organ
60's Drawbar Organ 1
60's Drawbar Organ 2
70's Drawbar Organ 1
60's Drawbar Organ 3
16+2"2/3
Organ Bass
70's Drawbar Organ 2
Cheezy Organ
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
054
055
000
Voice Oohs
1
034
035
000
018
040
043
045
065
Finger Bass
Finger Dark
Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar2
Finger Slap Bass
Finger Bass 2
1
2
000
040
041
064
Synth Voice
Synth Voice 2
Choral
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
Analog Voice
Modulated Bass
056
000
035
064
Orchestra Hit
Orchestra Hit 2
Impact
2
2
2
Drawbar Organ 3
000
Pick Bass
Muted Pick Bass
1
1
018
000
Percussive Organ
1
028
1 0 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
085
000
064
Charang Lead
Distorted Lead
2
2
Bra ss
Eth n ic, e tc.
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
086
087
000
Voice Lead
2
057
000
032
Trumpet
Warm Trumpet
1
2
105
000
032
035
097
Sitar
Detuned Sitar
Sitar 2
1
2
2
2
000
035
Fifths Lead
Big Five
2
2
058
000
018
Trombone
Trombone 2
1
Tamboura
088
000
016
064
065
067
068
Bass & Lead
Big & Low
Fat & Perky
Soft Whirl
Mogul
2
2
2
2
1
2
106
000
028
096
097
098
Banjo
Muted Banjo
Rabab
Gopichant
Oud
1
1
2
2
2
059
060
061
000
000
Tuba
1
1
Muted Trumpet
000
006
032
037
French Horn
1
1
2
2
French Horn Solo
French Horn 2
Horn Orchestra
Distance
107
108
000
Shamisen
1
000
096
097
Koto
Taisho-kin
Kanoon
1
2
2
Sy n th p a d , e tc.
PC
062
000
035
Brass Section
Trumpet & Trombone Section
1
CC32 XG Set
Elements
2
089
000
064
New Age Pad
Fantasy
2
2
109
110
111
112
113
000
000
000
000
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
1
2
1
1
063
064
000
020
Synth Brass 1
Resonant Synth Brass
2
2
090
091
092
000
000
Warm Pad
Poly Synth Pad
2
2
000
018
041
Synth Brass 2
Soft Brass
Choir Brass
1
2
2
Shanai
000
066
Choir Pad
Itopia
2
2
000
096
097
098
099
100
Tinkle Bell
Bonang
Altair
Gamelan Gongs
Stereo Gamelan Gongs
Rama Cymbal
2
2
2
2
2
2
093
094
095
096
000
000
000
000
Bowed Pad
Metallic Pad
Halo Pad
2
2
2
2
Re e d
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
1
065
000
Soprano Sax
Sweep Pad
066
000
040
Alto Sax
Sax Section
1
2
114
115
000
Agogo
2
000
097
098
Steel Drums
Glass Percussion
Thai Bells
2
2
2
Sy n th SFX
PC
067
000
040
Tenor Sax
Breathy Tenor Sax
1
2
CC32 XG Set
Elements
097
000
065
066
Rain
African Wind
Carib
2
2
2
068
069
070
071
072
000
000
000
000
000
Baritone Sax
Oboe
1
2
1
1
1
116
117
118
000
096
Woodblock
Castanets
1
1
000
096
Taiko Drum
Gran Cassa
1
1
English Horn
Bassoon
Clarinet
098
099
000
027
Sound Track
Prologue
2
2
000
064
065
066
Melodic Tom
Melodic Tom 2
Real Tom
2
1
2
2
000
012
014
018
035
040
041
042
065
070
071
072
Crystal
Synth Drum Comp
Popcorn
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rock Tom
Pip e
PC
Tiny Bells
119
000
064
065
Synth Drum
Analog Tom
Electronic Percussion
1
1
2
Round Glockenspiel
Glockenspiel Chimes
Clear Bells
Chorus Bells
Soft Crystal
Air Bells
CC32 XG Set
Elements
1
073
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Piccolo
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
Flute
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
120
000
Reverse Cymbal
1
Recorder
Pan Flute
Blown Bottle
Shakuhachi
Whistle
SFX
PC
Bell Harp
Gamelimba
CC32 XG Set
Elements
2
100
000
018
019
040
064
065
066
Atmosphere
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
121
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
Fret Noise
Warm Atmosphere
Hollow Release
Nylon Electric Piano
Nylon Harp
Harp Vox
Atmosphere Pad
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Breath Noise
Seashore
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Ocarina
Bird Tweet
Telephone Ring
Helicopter
Applause
Sy n th le a d
PC
CC32 XG Set
Elements
101
102
000
Brightness
2
081
000
006
008
018
019
064
065
066
Square Lead
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
Square Lead 2
LM Square
Hollow
Shroud
Mellow
000
064
065
067
068
070
071
096
Goblins
Goblins Synth
Creeper
Ritual
To Heaven
Night
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Gunshot
Solo Sine
Sine Lead
Glisten
Bell Choir
082
000
006
008
018
019
020
096
Sawtooth Lead
Sawtooth Lead 2
Thick Sawtooth
Dynamic Sawtooth
Digital Sawtooth
Big Lead
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
103
104
000
000
Echoes
Sci-Fi
2
2
Sequenced Analog
083
084
000
065
Calliope Lead
Pure Pad
2
2
000
Chiff Lead
2
1 0 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Dru m se t list (GM2 / N a tive m o d e )
PC
MSB
Classical Set
MSB
Contemporary Set
MSB
Solo Set
MSB
Enhanced Set
001
009
017
025
026
033
041
049
057
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
Standard Set
Room Set
Power Set
Electro Set
Analog Set
Jazz Set
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
StandardSet2
Room Set 2
Power Set 2
Dance Set
Rave Set
Jazz Set 2
Brush Set 2
<-
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
St.Standard
St.Room
St.Power
Rust Set
Analog2 Set
St.Jazz
St.Brush
<-
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
Amb.Standard
Amb.Room
Gated Power
Techno Set
Bully Set
Amb.Jazz
Amb.Brush
<-
Brush Set
OrchestraSet
SFX Set
<-
<-
<-
1 0 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● Cla ssica l se t d ru m se t (1 )
<-: Same as the percussion sound of “Standard Set” (PC 1)
*
BANK MSB=104, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 1
Standard Set
High Q
PC 9
Room Set
<-
PC 17
Power Set
<-
PC 25
Electric Set
<-
PC 26
Analog Set
<-
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
Slap
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
Kick Drum 2
Kick Drum 1
Side Stick
30
32
34
Power Kick 2
Power Kick 1
<-
PowerSnareDr
<-
<-
PowerLowTom2
<-
PowerLowTom1
<-
PowerMidTom2
<-
PowerMidTom1
Power HiTom2
Elec.Kick 2
Elec.Kick 1
<-
E.SnareDrum1
<-
<-
E.Low Tom 2
<-
E.Low Tom 1
<-
E.Mid Tom 2
<-
E.Mid Tom 1
E.Hi Tom 2
Ana.Kick 2
Ana.Kick 1
Ana.Rim Sho
Ana.Snare 1
<-
<-
Ana.Low Tom2
Ana.ClosedHH
Ana.Low Tom1
Ana.ClosedHH
Ana.Mid Tom2
Ana.Open HH
Ana.Mid Tom1
Ana.Hi Tom2
Ana.Cymbal
Ana.Hi Tom1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
C2
37
39
Aco.Snare
Hand Clap
Elec.Snare
Room Snare
<-
<-
Room LowTom2
<-
Room LowTom1
<-
Room MidTom2
<-
Room MidTom1
Room Hi Tom2
Low Tom 2
ClosedHi-hat
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
CrashCymbal1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal1
China Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
SplashCymbal
Cowbell
CrashCymbal2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
MuteHi Conga
OpenHi Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
42
44
46
C3 48
50
49
51
<-
<-
<-
Room Hi Tom1
Power HiTom1
E.Hi Tom 1
<-
Reverse Cym.
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
52
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
<-
Ana.Hi Conga
Ana.MidConga
Ana.LowConga
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Ana.Maracas
<-
<-
<-
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
71
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
LowWoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
---
C5 72
74
73
75
<-
Ana.Claves
76
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
88
1 0 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● Cla ssica l se t d ru m se t (2 )
*
BANK MSB=104, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 33
Jazz Set
<-
PC 41
Brush Set
<-
PC 49
OrchestraSet
ClosedHi-hat
PC 57
SFX Set
---
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal1
<-
<-
<-
<-
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
<-
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
30
32
34
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
BrushLowTom2
Brush CHH
BrushLowTom1
Brush PHH
BrushMidTom2
Brush OHH
BrushMidTom1
Brush HiTom2
Brush Crash1
---
---
---
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
C2
37
39
42
44
46
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
GtFret Noise
Cut Noise Up
Cut Noise Dw
Slap_St.Bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps 1
Footsteps 2
Applause
Door Creak
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
C3 48
50
49
51
Brush HiTom1
Brush Ride 1
<-
52
BrushRideBel
53
54
56
58
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
Train
69
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
71
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
<-
<-
<-
<-
Bubble
---
---
---
---
C6 84
86
85
87
88
---
Applause
1 0 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● Co n te m p o ra ry se t d ru m se t (1 )
<-: Same as the percussion sound of “StandardSet2” (PC 1)
*
BANK MSB=105, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 1
Standard Set2
High Q
PC 9
Room Set 2
<-
PC 17
Power Set 2
<-
PC 25
Dance Set
<-
PC 26
Rave Set
<-
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
Slap
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
808 Kick
Round Kick
Ana.Rim Shot
808 Snare
<-
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
Kick Drum 2
Kick Drum 1
Side Stick
Aco. Snare
Hand Clap
Elec. Snare
Low Tom 2
ClosedHi-hat
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
CrashCymbal1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal1
China Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
SplashCymbal
Cowbell
CrashCymbal2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
MuteHi Conga
OpenHi Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
30
32
34
Power Kick 2
Power Kick 1
<-
PowerSnareDr
<-
<-
PowerLowTom2
<-
PowerLowTom1
<-
PowerMidTom2
<-
PowerMidTom1
Power HiTom2
Dance Kick
Techno Kick
<-
Dance Snare
<-
<-
Ana.Low Tom2
<-
Ana.Low Tom1
<-
Ana.Mid Tom2
<-
Ana.Mid Tom1
Ana.Hi Tom2
<-
<-
C2
37
39
Room Snare
<-
<-
Room LowTom2
<-
Room LowTom1
<-
Room MidTom2
<-
Room MidTom1
Room Hi Tom2
<-
808LowTom 2
Ana.ClosedHH
808LowTom 1
Ana.ClosedHH
808MidTom 2
Ana.Open HH
808MidTom 1
808Hi Tom 2
Ana.Cymbal
808Hi Tom 1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Ana.Cowbell
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Ana.Hi Conga
Ana.MidConga
Ana.LowConga
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
42
44
46
C3 48
50
49
51
<-
<-
<-
Room Hi Tom1
Power HiTom1
Ana.Hi Tom1
<-
Reverse Cym.
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
52
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Ana.Maracas
<-
<-
<-
71
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
LowWoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
---
C5 72
74
73
75
<-
Ana.Claves
76
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
88
1 0 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● Co n te m p o ra ry se t d ru m se t (1 )
*
BANK MSB=105, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 33
Jazz Set 2
<-
PC 41
Brush Set 2
<-
PC 49
OrchestraSet
ClosedHi-hat
PC 57
SFX Set
---
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal1
<-
<-
<-
<-
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
<-
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
30
32
34
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
BrushLowTom2
Brush CHH
BrushLowTom1
Brush PHH
BrushMidTom2
Brush OHH
BrushMidTom1
Brush HiTom2
Brush Crash1
---
---
---
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
C2
<-
Jazz Snare
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
37
39
42
44
46
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
GtFret Noise
Cut Noise Up
Cut Noise Dw
Slap_St.Bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps 1
Footsteps 2
Applause
Door Creak
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
C3 48
50
49
51
Brush HiTom1
Brush Ride 1
<-
52
BrushRideBel
53
54
56
58
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
Train
69
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
71
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
Bubble
---
---
---
---
C6 84
86
85
87
88
Applause
1 0 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● So lo se t d ru m se t (1 )
<-: Same as the percussion sound of “St.Standard” (PC 1)
*
BANK MSB=106, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 1
St.Standard
High Q
PC 9
St.Room
<-
PC 17
St.Power
<-
PC 25
Rust Set
<-
PC 26
Analog2 Set
<-
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
Slap
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
Kick Drum 2
Kick Drum 1
Side Stick
Snare Drum 1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Low Tom 2
ClosedHi-hat
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
CrashCymbal1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal1
China Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
SplashCymbal
Cowbell
CrashCymbal2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
MuteHi Conga
OpenHi Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
30
32
34
Rock Kick Dr
<-
<-
Rock SnareDr
<-
<-
Room LowTom2
<-
Room LowTom1
<-
Room MidTom2
<-
Room MidTom1
Room Hi Tom2
Rock Kick Dr
Round Kick
<-
Rock SnareDr
<-
Piccolo SN
PowerLowTom2
70s Kick 1
Dance Kick
<-
Old Fill SN
<-
Rock SN
Elec.Tom L2
909 Kick 2
909 Kick 1
Ana.Rim Shot
909 Snare 1
C2
37
39
<-
909 Snare 2
Ana.Low Tom2
<-
Ana.Low Tom1
<-
Ana.Mid Tom2
<-
Ana.Mid Tom1
Ana.Hi Tom2
<-
Ana.Hi Tom1
<-
<-
<-
42
44
46
<-
<-
PowerLowTom1
<-
PowerMidTom2
<-
PowerMidTom1
Power HiTom2
<-
Elec.Tom L1
<-
Elec.Tom M2
<-
Elec.Tom M1
Elec.Tom H2
<-
Elec.Tom H1
<-
Reverse Cym.
C3 48
50
<-
49
51
Room Hi Tom1
Power HiTom1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
52
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
53
54
56
58
<-
<-
55
Ana.Cowbell
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Ana.Hi Conga
Ana.MidConga
Ana.LowConga
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Ana.Maracas
<-
<-
<-
71
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
LowWoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
---
C5 72
74
73
75
<-
Ana.Claves
76
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
88
1 1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● So lo se t d ru m se t (2 )
*
BANK MSB=106, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 33
St.Jazz
<-
PC 41
St.Brush
<-
PC 49
OrchestraSet
ClosedHi-hat
PC 57
SFX Set
---
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal1
<-
<-
<-
<-
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
<-
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
30
32
34
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
BrushLowTom2
Brush CHH
BrushLowTom1
Brush PHH
BrushMidTom2
Brush OHH
BrushMidTom1
Brush HiTom2
Brush Crash1
Brush HiTom1
Brush Ride 1
<-
BrushRideBel
<-
<-
<-
Brush Crash2
<-
Brush Ride 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
---
---
---
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
C2
37
39
Jazz Snare 1
<-
Jazz Snare 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
42
44
46
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
GtFret Noise
Cut Noise Up
Cut Noise Dw
Slap_St.Bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps 1
Footsteps 2
Applause
Door Creak
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
Train
69
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
71
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
Bubble
---
---
---
---
C6 84
86
85
87
88
Applause
1 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● En h a n ce d se t d ru m se t (1 )
<-: Same as the percussion sound of “Amb.Standard” (PC 1)
*
BANK MSB=107, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 1
Amb.Standard
High Q
PC 9
Amb.Room
<-
PC 17
Gated Power
<-
PC 25
Techno Set
<-
PC 26
Bully Set
<-
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
Slap
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
Kick Drum 2
Kick Drum 1
Side Stick
Snare Drum 1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Low Tom 2
ClosedHi-hat
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
CrashCymbal1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal1
China Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
SplashCymbal
Cowbell
CrashCymbal2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
MuteHi Conga
OpenHi Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
30
32
34
Rock Kick Dr
<-
<-
Rock SnareDr
<-
<-
Room LowTom2
<-
Room LowTom1
<-
Room MidTom2
<-
Room MidTom1
Room Hi Tom2
Rock Kick Dr
<-
<-
Rock SnareDr
<-
<-
Room LowTom2
<-
Room LowTom1
<-
Room MidTom2
<-
Room MidTom1
Room Hi Tom2
909 Kick 1
909 Kick 2
<-
Techno Snare
<-
Punch Snare
Elec.Tom L2
909 Kick 3
909 Kick 4
Ana.Rim Shot
909 Snare
C2
37
39
<-
808 Snare
Ana.Low Tom2
<-
Ana.Low Tom1
<-
Ana.Mid Tom2
<-
Ana.Mid Tom1
Ana.Hi Tom2
<-
Ana.Hi Tom1
<-
<-
<-
42
44
46
<-
Elec.Tom L1
<-
Elec.Tom M2
<-
Elec.Tom M1
Elec.Tom H2
<-
Elec.Tom H1
<-
Reverse Cym.
C3 48
50
<-
<-
49
51
Room Hi Tom1
Room Hi Tom1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
52
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
53
54
56
58
<-
<-
55
Ana.Cowbell
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Ana.Hi Conga
Ana.MidConga
Ana.LowConga
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Ana.Maracas
<-
<-
<-
71
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
LowWoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
---
C5 72
74
73
75
<-
Ana.Claves
76
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
88
1 1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● En h a n ce d se t d ru m se t (2 )
*
BANK MSB=107, LSB=0
fig.drum24-87
PC 33
Amb.Jazz
<-
PC 41
Amb.Brush
<-
PC 49
OrchestraSet
ClosedHi-hat
PC 57
SFX Set
---
25
27
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal1
<-
<-
<-
<-
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
<-
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
30
32
34
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
<-
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
BrushLowTom2
Brush CHH
BrushLowTom1
Brush PHH
BrushMidTom2
Brush OHH
BrushMidTom1
Brush HiTom2
Brush Crash1
Brush HiTom1
Brush Ride 1
<-
BrushRideBel
<-
<-
<-
Brush Crash2
<-
Brush Ride 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
---
---
---
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
C2
37
39
Jazz Snare 1
<-
Jazz Snare 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
---
42
44
46
Square Click
Metron Click
Metron Bell
GtFret Noise
Cut Noise Up
Cut Noise Dw
Slap_St.Bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps 1
Footsteps 2
Applause
Door Creak
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
Train
69
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
71
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
Bubble
---
---
---
---
C6 84
86
85
87
88
Applause
1 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Dru m se t list (GS m o d e )
*
The instrument names listed here are the proper names for the XGlite sound module mode. Due to the limited number of letters
that can be used for the display, the names shown in the display may be slightly different from the instrument names listed here.
PC
001
009
017
025
026
033
041
049
057
GS Set
STANDARD
ROOM
POWER
ELECTRONIC
TR-808
JAZZ
BRUSH
ORCHESTRA
SFX
1 1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● GS m o d e d ru m se t (1 )
fig.drum25-99
PC 1 / PC 33
PC 9
PC 17
PC 25
PC 26
PC 41
PC 49
STANDARD / JAZZ ROOM
POWER
ELECTRONIC
TR-808
BRUSH
ORCHESTRA
----
----
High Q
----
----
<-
----
----
<-
----
----
<-
----
----
<-
----
----
<-
----
----
25
27
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
Closed Hi-hat
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal1
<-
<-
<-
<-
Slap
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Elec BD
<-
Elec SD
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick Drum2 / Jazz
Kick Drum1 / Jazz
Side Stick
Snare Drum1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum2
Low Tom2
Closed Hi-hat
Low Tom1
Pedal Hi-hat
Mid Tom2
Open Hi-hat
Mid Tom1
High Tom2
Crash Cymbal1
High Tom1
Ride Cymbal1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
30
32
34
Jazz BD2
Jazz BD1
<-
Concert BD2
Concert BD1
<-
MONDO Kick
<-
Gated SD
<-
808 Bass Drum
808 Rim Shot
808 Snare Drum Brush Tap
<-
<-
C2
37
39
Concert SD
Brush Slap Castanets
Brash Swirl Concert SD
<-
<-
Gated SD
Room Low
<-
Room Low
<-
Room Low
<-
Room Low
<-
Elec Low Tom2 808 Low Tom2
<- 808 CHH
Elec Low Tom1 808 Low Tom1
<- 808 CHH
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
<-
<-
<-
Concert
<-
Concert
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
42
44
46
Room Mid Tom2 Room Mid Tom2 Elec Mid Tom2 808 Mid Tom2
<- <- <- 808 OHH
Room Mid Tom1 Room Mid Tom1 Elec Mid Tom1 808 Mid Tom1
Room Hi Tom2 Room Hi Tom2 Elec Hi Tom2
<-
808 Hi Tom2
808 Cymbal
808 Hi Tom1
<-
C3 48
50
<-
Room Hi Tom1 Elec Hi Tom1
<- <-
Reverse Cymbal <-
<-
49
51
Room Hi Tom1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
----
52
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
----
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
----
<-
<-
<-
53
54
56
58
55
808 Cowbell
57
Crash Cymbal2
Vibra-slap
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
59
Ride Cymbal2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
61
63
808 High Conga <-
808 Mid Conga <-
808 Low Conga <-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
808 Maracas
<-
<-
<-
64
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
----
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle
71
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
----
<-
808 Claves
76
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
----
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
88
Applause
1 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● GS m o d e d ru m se t (2 )
fig.drum35-108
PC 57
SFX
35
36
----
----
----
----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar Fret Noise
Guitar cutting
Guitar cutting
String slap of double
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
C2
37
39
38
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
C3 48
50
49
51
52
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
Door Creaking
Door
Scratch
C4 60
62
61
63
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
71
Gun Shot
C5 72
74
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
73
75
76
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Bubble
----
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
----
----
----
88
----
----
----
----
----
----
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
1 1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Dru m se t list (XGlite m o d e )
*
The instrument names listed here are the proper names for the XGlite sound module mode. Due to the limited
number of letters that can be used for the display, the names shown in the display may be slightly different from the
instrument names listed here.
PC
MSB
LSB
XG Set
MSB
LSB
XG Set
001
002
009
017
025
026
033
041
049
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Standard Kit
Standard Kit 2
Room Kit
126
126
0
0
SFX Kit 1
SFX Kit 2
Rock Kit
Electro Kit
Analog Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush Kit
Classic Kit
1 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● XGlite m o d e d ru m se t (1 )
*
BANK MSB=127, LSB=0
fig.drum12-64
PC001
Standard Kit
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
PC002
Standard Kit 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
PC009
Room Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
PC017
Rock Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
PC025
Electro Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
C012
14
13
15
16
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
17
18
20
22
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
19
21
23
C124
26
<-
<-
<-
25
27
28
Reverse Cymbal
<-
Hi Q 2
Snare Snappy Elec-
<-
Kick 3
<-
Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy
<-
Snare Noisy 2
<-
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
Snare Roll 2
<-
Snare Soft 2
<-
29
30
32
34
Snare Noisy
<-
Kick Tight 2
<-
Kick 2
Kick Gate
<-
Snare Rock
<-
Snare Rock Rim
Tom Rock 1
31
33
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Open Rim Shot H
Kick Tight Short
Kick Short
<-
Snare Short
<-
Snare Tight H
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
C2
<-
37
39
Snare Snappy
<-
Snare Tight Snappy
Tom Room 1
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
42
44
46
<-
<-
<-
Tom Room 2
<-
Tom Room 3
<-
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
<-
Tom Rock 2
<-
Tom Rock 3
<-
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
<-
Tom Electro 2
<-
Tom Electro 3
<-
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
<-
C3 48
50
49
51
Tom Room 6
Tom Rock 6
Tom Electro 6
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
59
C4 60
62
Bongo L
61
63
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
71
Samba Whistle H
1 1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
fig.drum72-84
PC001
PC002
PC009
PC017
PC025
Standard Kit
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Standard Kit 2
Room Kit
Rock Kit
Electro Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
79
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
81
83
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
C6 84
● XGlite m o d e d ru m se t (2 )
*
BANK MSB=127, LSB=0
fig.drum12-64
PC001
Standard Kit
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
PC026
Analog Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
PC033
Jazz Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
PC041
Brush Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
PC049
Classic Kit
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
C012
14
13
15
16
17
18
20
22
19
21
23
C124
26
25
27
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
28
Reverse Cymbal
<-
Hi Q 2
Snare Noisy 4
<-
Kick Tight 2
<-
Kick Analog Short
Kick Analog
Side Stick Analog
Snare Analog
<-
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hi-Hat Closed Ana-
Tom Analog 2
Hi-Hat Closed Ana-
Tom Analog 3
Hi-Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
<-
29
30
32
34
31
Brush Slap 2
<-
<-
<-
33
Kick Soft 2
<-
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa Mute
<-
Band Snare
<-
Band Snare 2
Tom Jazz 1
<-
Tom Jazz 2
<-
Tom Jazz 3
<-
Tom Jazz 4
Tom Jazz 5
Hand Cymbal
Tom Jazz 6
Hand Cymbal Short
<-
35
<-
<-
Kick Jazz
<-
<-
<-
Kick Small
<-
Brush Slap 3
<-
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
<-
Tom Brush 2
<-
Tom Brush 3
<-
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
<-
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
C2
37
39
<-
Tom Jazz 1
<-
Tom Jazz 2
<-
Tom Jazz 3
<-
Tom Jazz 4
Tom Jazz 5
42
44
46
C3 48
50
49
51
<-
Tom Jazz 6
<-
<-
Tom Brush 6
<-
<-
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
52
<-
1 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
fig.drum53-84
PC001
PC026
PC033
PC041
PC049
Standard Kit
Analog Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush Kit
Classic Kit
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Cowbell Analog
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Maracas 2
<-
<-
<-
<-
Claves 2
<-
<-
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 3
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Hand Cymbal 2
<-
Hand Cymbal 2 Short
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
C4 60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
67
68
69
70
71
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
C5 72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
C6 84
1 2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
● XGlite m o d e d ru m se t (3 )
*
BANK MSB=126, LSB=0
fig.drum36-90
PC001
SFX Kit 1
PC002
SFX Kit 2
Cutting Noise
Cutting Noise 2
---
String Slap
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
C2
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring 2
---
---
37
39
42
44
46
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
C3 48
50
49
51
52
Flute Key Click
Car Engine Igni-
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
---
---
---
---
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
---
C4 60
62
61
63
64
---
---
---
---
---
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
---
---
---
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
65
66
68
70
67
69
71
Bubble
---
---
---
Foot Steps
---
---
---
C5 72
74
73
75
76
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
77
78
80
82
79
81
83
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet 2
---
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
---
C6 84
86
85
87
88
---
---
Ghost
---
---
89
90
1 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
1 2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STUDIO CANVAS
Date : May 1, 2002
Version : 1.00
Model: SD-80
MIDI Implementation Chart
(GM2/Native mode)
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Channel Changed
Default
X
X
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M = 1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
X
0–127
0–127
True Voice
**************
Note On
Note Off
X
X
O
O
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
X
X
O
O
*1
*1
Pitch Bend
O
O
*1
0, 32
1
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
*4
O
*1
*1
Bank select
O
Modulation
5
*4
*4
*4
*4
O
Portamento time
Data entry
6, 38
7
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
Volume
10
11
64
65
66
67
68
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
84
91
93
O
Panpot
O
Expression
O
Hold 1
*4
O
Portamento
O
Sostenuto
O
Soft
O
Legato Foot Switch
Resonance
Control
Change
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
O
O
Release Time
O
Attack Time
O
Cutoff
O
Decay Time
O
Vibrato Rate
O
Vibrato Depth
O
Vibrato Delay
O (Tone 1 Level)
General Purpose Controller 5
General Purpose Controller 6
General Purpose Controller 7
General Purpose Controller 8
Portamento control
General purpose effects 1
General purpose effects 3
CC1, 2 (General purpose controller 1, 2)
CC3, 4 (General purpose controller 3, 4)
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
O (Tone 2 Level)
O (Tone 3 Level)
O (Tone 4 Level)
O
*4
*4
O (Reverb)
O (Chorus)
1–5, 7–31, 64–95 *3
1–5, 7–31, 64–95 *3
98, 99
O
O
X
100, 101
*4
O
Program
Change
O
*4
*5
O
0–127
*1
*1
**************
: True Number
Program No. 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O (120, 126, 127)
: All Sound Off
O
: Reset All Controllers
Aux
Messages
X
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
O (123–127)
O
X
* 1 O X is selectable.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M≠1.
* 3 Can be changed settings.
* 5 Transmits when Data Transfer is excuted or RQ1
received.
Notes
* 4 Transmits when GM Data Transfer is excuted .
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STUDIO CANVAS
Date : May 1, 2002
Version : 1.00
Model: SD-80
MIDI Implementation Chart
(GS mode)
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Channel Changed
Default
X
X
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M = 1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
X
0–127
0–127
True Voice
**************
Note On
Note Off
X
X
O
X
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
X
X
O
O
*1
*1
Pitch Bend
X
O
*1
0, 32
1
5
6, 38
7
10
11
64
65
66
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
Hold 1
Portamento
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Control
Change
Sostenuto
Soft
67
84
91
93
Portamento control
General purpose effects 1
General purpose effects 3
CC1(General purpose controller 1)
CC1(General purpose controller 2)
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
O (Reverb)
O (Chorus)
O
O
X
1–95 *3
1–95 *3
98, 99
100, 101
O
Program
Change
X
O
0–127
*1
**************
: True Number
Program No. 1–128
System Exclusive
X
O
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O (120, 126, 127)
: All Sound Off
O
: Reset All Controllers
Aux
Messages
X
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
O (123–127)
O
X
* 1 O X is selectable.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M≠1.
* 3 Can be changed settings.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sp e cifica tio n s
● Model: Studio Canvas SD-80
(General MIDI2 / GS format / XGlite format)
●Number of parts
●Power Supply
32
AC 120 V, AC 230 V or AC 240 V
●Maximum Polyphony
●Power Consumption
11W (AC 120 V)
128 voices
12W (AC 230 V)
●Internal Sounds
13W (AC 240 V)
Sound Maps:
6
(Classical, Contemporary, Solo, Enhanced, Special 1, Special 2)
●Dimensions
280 (W) x 258.4 (D) x 46 (H) mm
11-1/ 16 (W) x 10-3/ 16 (D) x 1-13/ 16 (H) inches
●Preset Memory
Internal Sounds:
Drum Sound sets:
1050
30
●Weight
1.8 kg
●User Memory
Internal Sounds:
Drum Sound sets:
4 lbs
128
16
●Accessories
USB cable
●Effects
AC cable
System Effects:
Reverb (6 types)
Owner’s Manual
Getting Started
Chorus (6 types)
Insertion Effects:
Multi-effects x 3 (90 types)
CD-ROM
●Display
Rack-mount adaptor
Desk-stand mount (with cushion sets)
40 characters, 2 lines (LCD with Backlight)
●Connectors
USB connector
Digital Audio OUT Connector
COAXIAL type (conforms to S/ P DIF)
OPTICAL type (conforms to S/ P DIF)
Output jack 1 (Stereo)
Output jack 2 (Stereo)
Headphones jack (Stereo)
MIDI connector (IN, OUT) x 2
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change
without prior notice.
1 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN DEX
Inst Initialize ....................................................... 50
Inst part ............................................................... 18
Inst Startup ......................................................... 51
INST/ DRUM ...................................................... 24
A
AC IN Connector ............................................... 12
Adobe Acrobat Reader ........................................ 9
B
C
capital sound ...................................................... 26
checksum ............................................................. 73
Chorus ............................................... 16, 39, 41, 45
Classical ............................................................... 17
Contemporary .................................................... 17
Contrast ............................................................... 15
Control Output ................................................... 51
LCD Contrast ..................................................... 50
LFO ...................................................................... 54
Low Frequency Oscillator ................................ 54
D
MFX ............................................................... 46, 64
MIDI Connector ................................................. 12
MIDI Indicator ................................................... 11
MIDI mode ......................................................... 20
MIDI OUT/ THRU Switch ................................ 12
Mode Indicator .................................................. 11
demo songs ......................................................... 13
Device ID Number ............................................. 51
DIGITAL OUT Jack ........................................... 12
Display ................................................................ 10
Drum part ........................................................... 18
E
EFFECTS Button ................................................ 10
Enhanced ............................................................. 17
ENTER ................................................................. 11
Envelope ........................................................ 35, 54
EQ ................................................................... 42, 48
equalizer .............................................................. 16
external MIDI device ......................................... 51
OUTPUT ............................................................. 12
F
PAGE Button ...................................................... 11
parameters .................................................... 30, 33
part ....................................................................... 23
PART Button ...................................................... 10
Part Mode ..................................................... 18, 24
part parameters ............................................ 31, 33
patch .................................................................... 50
pitch ..................................................................... 54
Polyphony .......................................................... 18
Preview Mode .............................................. 52
Preview Note ................................................ 52
Preview Velocity .......................................... 52
Factory Reset ...................................................... 52
G
Getting Started ..................................................... 9
GM2 ..................................................................... 16
Grounding Terminal ......................................... 12
H
I
individual data ............................................. 50, 70
INST ..................................................................... 24
INST Button ........................................................ 10
1 2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
R
S
SHIFT Button ...................................................... 11
Solo ....................................................................... 17
soloing ................................................................. 29
sound ................................................................... 26
sound generator mode .......................... 16, 22, 53
sound set ....................................................... 25, 55
Special .................................................................. 17
synthesizer .......................................................... 54
SysEX Device ID ................................................ 51
SYSTEM Button .................................................. 10
System Effect .......................................... 41, 43, 45
system exclusive data ........................................ 50
T
tempo ................................................................... 52
temporary area ................................................... 30
Time Variant Amplifier .................................... 54
Time Variant Filter ............................................ 54
TVA ...................................................................... 54
U
USB Connector ................................................... 12
USB Driver .......................................................... 52
USB Indicator ..................................................... 11
USB mode ........................................................... 19
V
VALUE dial ........................................................ 10
Variation number ......................................... 14, 26
Vibrato ................................................................. 36
voice ..................................................................... 18
W
WAVE .................................................................. 54
X
XGlite ................................................................... 16
1 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
1 2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
1 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
1 3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized
EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
IRELAND
HONG KONG
BARBADOS
PERU
CYPRUS
Roland Ireland
Parsons Music Ltd.
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
Audionet
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
EUROPE
EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.
Studio 3.4 114 Power Road
London W4 5PY
TEL: (022) 66-9426
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
U. K.
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949
FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948
http://www.edirol.com/europe
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868)638 6385
TEL: (021) 285-4169
Deutschland
TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20
France
TEL: 0810 000 371
Italia
TEL: 02 93778329
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
TEL: 2273 0074
JORDAN
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
POLAND
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
KOREA
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 VENEZUELA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
Medellin, Colombia
TEL: (574)3812529
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
NORTH AMERICA
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
MALAYSIA/
SINGAPORE
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
EUROPE
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
AUSTRIA
PHILIPPINES
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (905) 362 9707
TEL: (266) 364 609
Austrian Office
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
U. S. A.
RUSSIA
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (02) 899 9801
OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
TAIWAN
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL:(593-4)2302364
ROLAND TAIWAN
TEL: (323) 890 3700
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
GUATEMALA
SPAIN
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
QATAR
Badie Studio & Stores
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 423554
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
TEL: (014) 575811
TEL:(502) 599-2888
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,
New Road, Sumpantawongse,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 224-8821
CZECH REP.
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
SWEDEN
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (2) 666 10529
VIETNAM
SAIGON MUSIC
DISTRIBUTOR
(TAN DINH MUSIC)
138 Tran Quang Khai Street
Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
REUNION
DENMARK
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
TEL: 3916 6200
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (08) 848-4068
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
UKRAINE
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TEL: (021) 799 4900
MEXICO
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
AUSTRALIA/
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
UNITED KINGDOM
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
ASIA
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
CHINA
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
MIDDLE EAST
TEL: (04) 3360715
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: (505)277-2557
HUNGARY
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
TEL: 17 211 005
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
TEL: (23) 511011
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
TEL: (020) 8736-0428
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
As of December 10, 2005 (EDIROL-1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|